diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 4 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/65942-0.txt | 3801 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/65942-0.zip | bin | 63562 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/65942-h.zip | bin | 3791170 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/65942-h/65942-h.htm | 4026 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/65942-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 351688 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/65942-h/images/p01a.jpg | bin | 25491 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/65942-h/images/p02.jpg | bin | 51559 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/65942-h/images/p03.jpg | bin | 214312 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/65942-h/images/p04.jpg | bin | 188816 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/65942-h/images/p04a.jpg | bin | 106312 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/65942-h/images/p05.jpg | bin | 72502 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/65942-h/images/p06.jpg | bin | 291302 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/65942-h/images/p07.jpg | bin | 55741 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/65942-h/images/p08.jpg | bin | 95442 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/65942-h/images/p09.jpg | bin | 231219 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/65942-h/images/p10.jpg | bin | 63837 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/65942-h/images/p11.jpg | bin | 203376 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/65942-h/images/p12.jpg | bin | 80516 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/65942-h/images/p13.jpg | bin | 90379 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/65942-h/images/p14.jpg | bin | 251667 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/65942-h/images/p15.jpg | bin | 89997 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/65942-h/images/p16.jpg | bin | 285620 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/65942-h/images/p17.jpg | bin | 91453 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/65942-h/images/p18.jpg | bin | 109587 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/65942-h/images/p19.jpg | bin | 190207 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/65942-h/images/p20.jpg | bin | 87405 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/65942-h/images/p21.jpg | bin | 180889 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/65942-h/images/p22.jpg | bin | 234635 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/65942-h/images/p23.jpg | bin | 52473 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/65942-h/images/spine.jpg | bin | 33965 -> 0 bytes |
33 files changed, 17 insertions, 7827 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d7b82bc --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +*.txt text eol=lf +*.htm text eol=lf +*.html text eol=lf +*.md text eol=lf diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b0e002f --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #65942 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/65942) diff --git a/old/65942-0.txt b/old/65942-0.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 08de551..0000000 --- a/old/65942-0.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,3801 +0,0 @@ -The Project Gutenberg eBook of Jim Long-Knife, by Florance Walton Taylor - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and -most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms -of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you -will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before -using this eBook. - -Title: Jim Long-Knife - -Author: Florance Walton Taylor - -Illustrator: Dirk Gringhuis - -Release Date: July 28, 2021 [eBook #65942] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: UTF-8 - -Produced by: Stephen Hutcheson and the Online Distributed Proofreading - Team at https://www.pgdp.net - -*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK JIM LONG-KNIFE *** - - - - - JIM LONG-KNIFE - - - By Florance Walton Taylor - - [Illustration: uncaptioned] - - Illustrated by - Dirk Gringhuis - - - ALBERT WHITMAN & COMPANY - Chicago Illinois - - Second Printing 1967 - Copyright 1959 by - ALBERT WHITMAN & COMPANY - L. C. Card 59-9656 - -Published simultaneously in the Dominion of Canada by George J. McLeod, - Limited, Toronto. Printed in - the U.S.A. - - Dedication - To Alan’s three little queens; - Elizabeth, - Leslie, - Sarah. - - [Illustration: uncaptioned] - - Permission is gratefully acknowledged for the use of material from - “George Rogers Clark Papers” in Vol. 8 of the _Collections_ of the - Illinois State Historical Library, edited by James Alton James, - copyright 1912. - - [Illustration: _Minnemung_] - - - - - TABLE OF CONTENTS - - - I. A Strange Guest 7 - II. Was It a Trick? 25 - III. An Exchange at the Salt Lick 42 - IV. Winter with the Potawatomis 57 - V. The Long Knives 74 - VI. On to Kaskaskia 94 - VII. No Adoption 108 - VIII. A Peaceful Interval 120 - IX. Through the Drowned Lands 137 - X. Capture of Vincennes 155 - - [Illustration: uncaptioned] - - [Illustration: uncaptioned] - - - - - Chapter I - A STRANGE GUEST - - -Thirteen-year-old Jim Hudson thumped a melon with practiced fingers, -then pulled it from the vine and laid it in a pile with the others. He -wiped his hot forehead with his sweaty shirtsleeve, turning with a smile -toward his mother. “Look, Ma!” he called, “See how many melons we have. -And how fine the turnips and corn look.” - -Ma Hudson, her rifle across her knees, was sitting on a large stump in -the little clearing. She turned at the sound of Jim’s voice, and smiled -wearily at her towheaded boy. “Yes, Jim. We’ll have plenty to eat this -winter, I’m thinking.” - -Jim moved on to another vine and glanced along the row to where his -father was kneeling. Ma pushed her sunbonnet back over her faded yellow -hair and resumed her watch into the wilderness surrounding the clearing. - -All during the spring and summer the Hudsons had worked in this fashion. -Jim and Pa had planted their crops and enlarged the clearing by felling -trees, while Ma had sat ready with the Kentucky rifle, and looked for -hostile Indians. - -This year of 1777 was a fearful one for Kentucky settlers. Some had been -captured or killed by Indians; others had returned to Virginia -discouraged by repeated Indian attacks. The Hudsons, however, had not -been molested and Pa Hudson was determined to stay on his land. It was -the first farm he had ever owned; he loved every inch of this lush -Kentucky wilderness. He and Jim continued to gather melons. Jim worked -faster than his father, because each time Pa moved from one vine to -another, he had to pick up his rifle lying close by on the ground. - -Suddenly Jim raised his head and listened. Then he turned to his father. -“Pa, I hear something groaning. Do you?” - -Pa seized his rifle and was on his feet immediately. “Where, son?” - -Jim cocked his head toward the right. “Over there. Listen. There it is -again.” - -At this moment Ma Hudson called, “Pa, I hear groaning.” She was already -picking her way among the stumps toward the sound, the rifle grasped -firmly in her hands. - -Pa went striding through the melon patch. “Wait, Ma. Let me go first.” -Soon he was ahead of her, with Jim beside him. - -The three made their way through the tangled brambles into woods so -dense the Hudsons seemed to be walking in twilight. Quite suddenly they -saw a bridled horse standing quietly just ahead of them. In a moment the -groaning sound came again, this time to the left of where Jim was -standing. - -He whirled around, scrambled over a large fallen tree and cried, “Why, -here’s a boy! Kind of a small boy, too.” Jim started to stoop down -toward the prostrate form. - -Pa sprang to his side. “Wait a minute, son.” He peered through the gloom -and saw an Indian boy smaller than Jim, dressed in a long blue cloth -shirt, his face streaked with hideous vermilion. “Maybe this is a -trick,” Pa muttered. “Perhaps he’s been put here to lure us into a -trap.” Holding his rifle ready, Pa started looking about in the shadowy -woods. - -Ma Hudson’s hands trembled as she held her rifle and looked down at the -boy. “Pa, he’s hurt. Look at his shoulder. This is no trick.” - -Pa handed his rifle to Jim. “You watch with Ma, while I have a look at -him.” He dropped to his knees to examine the boy, mumbling, “I’m still -afraid it’s an Indian trick.” - -As Pa turned the boy to one side, he saw an ugly wound where the blue -shirt was torn from one shoulder. Then he looked closely at the wound. -“Why, I can see a bone too, Ma. I think he’s broken his shoulder.” - -Ma forgot about the possibility of other Indians lurking near, as she -ventured closer to Pa to look at the boy again. “Pa, he’s not as old as -Jim. We’ll have to take care of him. We can’t leave him here.” - -“No, reckon we can’t,” Pa replied, as he tried to lift the Indian boy -from the tangled underbrush. But the boy’s body was enmeshed in a stout -wild grapevine. Pa took out his long knife and began slashing at the -tangled vine. - -At this moment, the Indian boy groaned and opened his eyes. He looked up -at the Hudsons in alarm. When he saw Pa’s long knife, he was terrified -and cried out, “_Shemolsea! Shemolsea!_” - -“What did you say?” Jim asked, but the boy had lost consciousness again. - -When Pa had freed the boy from the vine, he gathered him in his arms and -turned to Jim. “You go ahead with the rifle, Jim, and Ma, you walk -behind me. Mind you both keep a sharp lookout. We’ll have to take him -back to the cabin.” - -“But Pa,” put in Jim, “what’ll we do about the horse?” He nodded toward -the animal standing a few feet away. - -“Bring him along. And tie him up in our lean-to next to Nellie. But not -too close to our horse. She might nip him.” - -The Hudsons took the boy and his horse back to their cabin without -seeing another human being. While Jim tethered the horse at a safe -distance from Nellie, Ma flew about the cabin getting water, her -home-made soap, and clean rags for Pa. He set the wounded boy’s broken -bone as best he could, supporting it with a rude splint. Then with Ma’s -help, he washed the wound with soap and bound the shoulder with rags to -hold the bone securely in place. - -When they had finished Pa shook his head. “I’m afraid he’s lost a lot of -blood. He’ll be a while getting well.” - -Ma turned to Jim who was standing in the doorway of the cabin. “Jim, -we’ll have to put him in your bed. He’s awfully weak.” - -Jim nodded. “Sure, Ma. He’s welcome to it. I can sleep on the floor.” - -Pa Hudson laid the boy carefully on Jim’s bed, muttering all the while. -“I don’t like harboring an Indian in my house. No, sir, I don’t.” Then -he turned to Jim. “You stand guard at the door with Ma’s rifle and I’ll -go back for the melons. Some Indians might come swooping in here to get -him.” - -Ma’s eyes flashed as she stooped to pick up her rifle from the floor. -“No, Jim. You go help your pa. I’ll stand guard.” - -“All right. We’ll be right back,” Jim said; he dashed out to join his -father. - -When they had brought all the melons up to the cabin and stacked them in -the shade, they fed and watered the Indian boy’s horse. Inside the cabin -again they found the boy sound asleep. Now and then, Ma glanced at him -as she prepared supper. “Shall we wake him, Pa, and give him something -to eat?” - -Pa studied the Indian for a few minutes. “No. He’s breathing all right -but seems in pain. Probably wouldn’t want to eat anyway. Let’s not -bother him.” - -After supper the Hudsons conversed in low tones. “Where do you suppose -he came from, Pa?” Ma asked. - -Pa shrugged. “I’ve no idea, but now we know the Indians have been near -our farm.” - -Ma’s blue eyes widened and she shivered slightly. “It makes me fearful, -Pa. I’ve never really been afraid before.” She laid a thin, work-worn -hand on her husband’s brawny one. “Let’s go back to Virginia.” - -Jim glanced quickly at his father and saw Pa’s face set in a stubborn -mask. He was not surprised to hear his father say, “We can’t go all the -way back there alone, Ma. It’s too dangerous. And there’s nothing back -in Virginia for us. We were indentured servants, remember. I want to -hang on to our farm, all four hundred acres of it.” - -Ma sighed and smoothed back her faded blond hair. “But we’re free now, -Pa. We finished our time of service before we came out here three years -ago. And I’d like Jim to have some schooling.” - -Pa shook his head. “There’d be no future for us in Virginia. We have no -money to start back there. Here we have land, our own land. And this is -going to be a wonderful country. As for school, you can teach Jim the -way you’ve been doing. Weren’t you a governess in one of the big houses -of Virginia?” - -Jim had been looking from one to the other of his parents, his clear -blue eyes sparkling. “Please, Ma,” he said, “I want to stay here. You -can teach me lots more, and I can help Pa to clear and plant the land.” - -Pa nodded to Jim and smiled in approval. “There’s big men out here, too, -from the finest families of Virginia. Men like James Harrod, Robert -Todd, Simon Kenton and George Rogers Clark. - -“You certainly remember Clark, Ma. His father’s land joined where we -worked. George Rogers Clark will figure out some way to stop the -redskins. You surely don’t intend to let one lone Indian boy scare you -away from our home.” - -Ma tried to smile. “No. No Pa, of course not. But we can’t be sure there -aren’t other Indians near at hand.” - -“That’s true,” Pa agreed. “You and Jim go to bed. I’ll sit up for a -while and listen for any unusual sounds.” - -Ma shook her head. “I’ll stay up with you. Jim, I’ll make a pallet for -you.” She got up and fixed a comfortable bed on the floor for Jim. Then -she sat down in the cabin doorway beside her husband. - -Jim glanced at the Indian boy lying so quietly in his bed, dropped down -on the pallet and went to sleep. - -Ma and Pa Hudson continued to sit in the doorway, rifles by their side, -and to stare out into the silent black night. - -When Jim awakened the next morning, Ma had breakfast ready and the -Indian boy was looking solemnly at him from his bed. - -Jim jumped up. “Good morning, boy,” he said with a smile. “What’s your -name?” - -The Indian boy did not reply but kept his brown eyes fixed on Jim. - -Ma put a pewter bowl containing steaming hot grits at Jim’s place on the -table. “Wash your hands and face, son.” - -“Yes’m.” Jim poured some water into the washbasin and began splashing -water on his face and hands. As soon as he had finished he carried a pan -of water to their strange guest, so he could wash his face. - -But the Indian boy just stared at him and did not move. - -Ma came over and stood beside the boy. “Come now, boy,” she said -briskly, “I’ll wash your hands and face. Then you must have some -breakfast.” As she turned one hand over and began to wash it, he tried -to sit up, but fell back on the bed with a groan. - -“Poor boy. Your shoulder must hurt badly.” Ma tried to soothe him as she -continued with the washing. “I’ll have to get this awful stuff off your -face.” But when she began scrubbing his face, he groaned again and tried -to turn away. - -“Maybe it means something to him to wear that vermilion streak,” Jim -suggested. “Looks like mud, doesn’t it? Or it could be he doesn’t like -water.” - -Ma wasn’t able to get the Indian boy’s face thoroughly clean. She -brought a bowl of hot grits to him. “Here, boy, try to eat some of -this.” She held a spoonful of grits to his lips. - -The boy tasted it gingerly, found it good and opened his mouth for more. -Ma fed him the contents of the bowl while Jim and Pa ate their -breakfast. - -For several days the Hudsons’ strange guest rested in Jim’s bed. Now and -then he tried to sit up only to lie down again with a low moan. With -Ma’s good food, however, and excellent care, he did improve and seemed -to be less frightened at being with the white family. - -Little by little he and Jim began trying to talk to each other. By -signs, gestures, and a word or two, each boy began to learn a few words -of the other’s language. - -Jim learned that the Indian boy’s name was Wahbunou, which meant The -Juggler, and that he had been pulled from his horse when it galloped -under a large thorn tree. One of the low branches had brushed him off -and a large thorn had pierced his shoulder. He had fallen on a jagged -stump and into the tangled wild grapevine, where the Hudsons had found -him. But Jim was not able to find out what he was doing near their -clearing. - -As for Pa, he was disturbed because the Indian boy had been riding so -near their farm. Every night after Ma and Jim were asleep, he rose from -his bed and sat in the cabin doorway with his rifle ready. But no -Indians appeared. - -Sometime later Wahbunou was able to be up and about in the cabin. He -would watch Pa clean and oil his Deckard rifle, but he never offered to -touch it. Soon he began walking around the clearing with Jim and Ma -Hudson. He followed Ma everywhere, gratitude for her care shining in his -brown eyes. - -One morning Pa said, “We’d best have a look at that shoulder, Wahbunou, -to see if it’s healing properly.” But when Pa tried to remove the rag -bandage, Wahbunou jerked away like a wounded animal, terror in his eyes. - -“Come now, Wahbunou, I just want to look at it,” Pa said. “I promise not -to hurt you.” - -But Wahbunou would not permit Pa to touch the bandage. - -“Maybe I can show him something new, Pa, and get him calmed down a bit -so you can have a look,” Jim suggested. “I’ll get your drum, Pa. Maybe -he’s never seen a drum.” - -Pa shrugged. “Indians have drums, Jim, though not like ours. All right, -get it down for him.” - -Jim climbed on a chair and lifted Pa’s drum from its place on the top of -Ma’s high cupboard. “Look, Wahbunou.” Jim took the drumsticks and played -a short ruffle on the drum. - -Wahbunou seemed interested; he smiled as he reached for one of the -sticks. He grasped it gingerly, turning it over and over, finally -returning it to Jim who played another ruffle and a loud roll. Wahbunou -smiled again and reached for the drum. - -Jim nodded. “If you let Pa look at your shoulder, you may have it.” Jim -pointed to the Indian boy’s shoulder and then to his father. - -Wahbunou drew back, but finally nodded. - -Pa took the bandage off, and gently pulled the rough splint back far -enough to look at the boy’s shoulder. Then as gently, he replaced it. -“Your wound is healing fine, Wahbunou. Soon you’ll be as good as new.” - -Jim handed the drum to Wahbunou and the Indian boy beat out a queer, -rhythmical sound with the palm of his hand. He didn’t seem to know how -to use the drumsticks. Then the boys took turns beating it. Jim could -make many fancy rolls and ruffles, but Wahbunou could make only the one -sound. - -One day was like another at the cabin until nights began to grow much -cooler. Pa said any day now there would be a frost, so they’d soon have -to harvest the turnips and corn. - -Wahbunou’s shoulder healed nicely and Pa finally took off the bandage -and splint. Now that it was cooler and his shirt was in shreds, Ma said -Wahbunou should have a new outfit of clothes. She had been sewing for Pa -and Jim, so she made Wahbunou a homespun shirt and trousers. In his new -clothes Wahbunou looked like any Kentucky boy, save for his -copper-colored skin and straight, coarse black hair. - -Not many days after Pa had removed Wahbunou’s bandage, Ma awakened Pa -and Jim earlier than usual. “Jim! Pa!” she cried. “Wake up! He’s gone.” - -“Gone! Who’s gone?” Pa asked. - -“Wahbunou. He’s not in his bed.” - -Jim had scrambled into his clothes. “He’s probably outside, Ma,” he -cried as he dashed out-of-doors. But when Jim looked around their -dooryard and in the shed, he saw that Wahbunou’s horse was gone. He ran -back into the house. “Pa, Wahbunou _must_ be gone. His horse isn’t in -the shed with Nellie, either.” - -The Hudsons could not believe that Wahbunou would leave without telling -them good-bye; they spent a long time looking for him. But Wahbunou and -his horse were nowhere in sight. - -Finally Ma fixed breakfast. As she put bowls on the table, she sighed -and said, “I can’t understand why he wanted to leave us. He recovered so -nicely and seemed happy here.” - -Jim looked up from his food. “But Ma, maybe he wanted to go back to his -own people. I sure would if I were with the Indians or some other -strange folks.” - -Ma shrugged and brushed her hair back from her forehead. “That was the -wrong thing for him to do, Jim——go away without telling us good-bye. -Sneaking off in the night.” - -Pa looked up at his wife, his brown eyes thoughtful. “Now, Ma, I don’t -think he did anything so wrong. He was probably afraid we would try to -keep him from going, so he just left quietly in the night. I don’t -believe he was ungrateful. As Jim says, he probably longed for his own -people.” - -Jim finished his breakfast in silence and then suddenly said, “Do you -suppose some of the Indians came for him?” Jim’s eyes flashed in -excitement. - -Pa picked up his rifle and put on his homespun jacket. “I don’t think -they did, Jim, but I’ll have a look around to see if there are new -tracks of any kind. I believe I would have heard them. He probably just -rode off alone.” - -Ma began to take away the pewter bowls. “I don’t like it at all. I feel -queer, as if we were surrounded by Indians. I’m afraid we aren’t safe -here any more.” - - [Illustration: uncaptioned] - - - - - Chapter II - WAS IT A TRICK? - - -Not long after Wahbunou’s disappearance, a chill north wind blew into -the lush Kentucky valley, warning the Hudsons that winter was not far -away. Frosty mornings greeted them, and the trees putting on their -mantles of brown, red and gold, told them it was time to harvest both -turnips and corn. - -Jim and Pa spent several days gathering them, while Ma did sentinel duty -sitting on a stump with her rifle ready for use. But she was uneasy -while on guard, jumping at each snap of a twig. - -Finally the corn was shucked and piled high in one corner of the cabin. -Pa stored the turnips in a deep hole near the lean-to, so they would -keep all winter. One nippy day when the harvest was finished, Pa turned -to Jim after breakfast. “Jim, let’s go hunting today. I’d like to lay in -a supply of game before it gets any colder.” - -Jim’s blue eyes sparkled. “Today, Pa?” - -“Today’s as good as any time, Jim.” - -Ma looked troubled. “Must you go, Pa?” - -Pa nodded and patted his wife’s shoulder awkwardly. “Now Ma, you’ve been -nervous and upset ever since Wahbunou went away. I’d think you’d want us -to go hunting. Only yesterday you said you were tired of living on -rabbit. You’ll be all right here, but don’t leave the cabin. We’ll be -home by early evening.” - -Ma squared her shoulders and bristled a little. “Pa, I haven’t been any -more upset than usual. You know I’ve never liked this country; I want to -go back to Virginia.” She sighed. “I do know we need fresh meat. Well, -I’ll spend the day spinning my flax.” - -Pa’s brown eyes sparkled in relief. “That’s a good girl, Ma. Who knows? -Maybe we’ll get a deer. Then you’ll have a deerskin to make a jacket and -some leggings.” - -“Or maybe we’ll get a bear,” Jim boasted. - -Soon they were ready to go. Jim was dressed exactly like his father. -Each wore home-made moccasins, fur caps, loose thin homespun trousers, -topped by long fringed hunting shirts reaching nearly to their knees. -Their shirts were held in at the waist by broad belts. - -Pa hung his long knife from his belt and Jim started down the clearing, -carrying Pa’s heavy flintlock rifle. It was as long as Jim was tall and -difficult for him to carry, but he tried to manage it proudly. - -As Pa went striding through the thick woods, Jim did his best to keep up -with him. Now and then a squirrel darted along in front of them, or a -few wild turkeys flew over their heads, frightened by their approach. - -Jim stopped and started to raise his rifle. “Let’s shoot some turkeys, -Pa. Ma always likes to cook turkey.” - -Pa smiled and shook his head. “Not now, Jim. We’re out for bigger game. -On the way back we’ll bag a few squirrels and turkeys. Then we won’t -have to carry them so far.” - -A little farther on, Pa said, “If you should happen to see a bear or -deer, Jim, don’t be in a hurry to fire. Wait until the animal is close -to you. That Deckard works best if you fire it at close range. Always -remember, son, don’t get excited and fire too soon.” - -“I’ll remember, Pa.” - -Along about noon Jim suddenly froze in his tracks, certain that he had -seen a deer. Pa stopped, glanced in the direction Jim was looking and -nodded. The deer evidently had not picked up their scent, as it -continued to wander slowly toward them. - -Without a sound Jim brought his rifle to rest in a nearby tree notch and -waited. When it seemed the approaching deer would surely see them, he -fired. - -“Good boy, Jim,” Pa cried excitedly. “You got him on the first shot.” - - [Illustration: uncaptioned] - -Jim was elated because it was his very first deer. Of course he had shot -rabbits near their cabin, but a deer was a real triumph. Pa cut a long -limb from a tree and stripped off its branches. Then he trussed the -deer’s legs with a long strip of wild grapevine. - -“Now, Jim, help me to run this limb between the deer’s legs, so we can -carry it easily.” - -In a jiffy they had the deer slung from the limb. Pa put one end of the -limb on Jim’s shoulder and the other on his own, so they could carry the -animal through the forest without difficulty. It was a fine young buck, -and would furnish plenty of meat for them, perhaps even a new hunting -shirt. - -“Better give me the rifle now, Jim. It’s most too heavy for you with -that limb on your shoulder. We’ll work our way home by Coon Hollow -Trace. There’s always plenty of game in that neighborhood.” - -When they arrived at Coon Hollow, a small crossroads in the forest, Jim -said, “Look, Pa. I think I see someone coming down that trace.” He -nodded toward the north. - -Instantly Pa laid the deer on the ground and held his rifle ready. He -peered ahead for a moment, then said, “I see two men, Jim, and I think -one’s leading a pack horse. We’ll wait a little.” - -As the men came nearer, Pa suddenly recognized the taller one. “George -Rogers Clark! As I live and breathe.” Then he raised his arm in -greeting. “Howdy, Mr. Clark. I don’t reckon you remember me. I’m Jim -Hudson. I used to work the land bordering your father’s farm back in -Virginia. And this is my son, Jim.” - -The tall, red-haired man looked at Pa Hudson for a moment and then -smiled, his hazel eyes shining and friendly. He shook hands with Jim, -then with Pa. “Of course I remember you, Hudson.” He gestured toward his -companion. “This is Tom Shelton. He’s one of the settlers going back to -Virginia with me.” - -“Howdy,” Tom Shelton said, shaking Pa’s hand. - -George Rogers Clark looked inquiringly at the Hudsons. Then he asked, -“What are you doing out here so far from Virginia?” - -“We came out here three years ago,” Pa replied, “to take up a claim. -It’s wonderful land; my boy and I are clearing it as fast as we can.” - -While Pa talked about his dreams for his claim, Jim stared at the -splendidly built man his father had called Mr. Clark. He was taller than -Pa, young too, and most impressive-looking. - -Tom Shelton shook his head when Pa paused for breath. “No more Kentucky -for me. I’m beat. I can’t take these Indian raids any longer. Last week -finished me. My nearest neighbors were attacked and taken prisoners. I -got all my possessions with me.” He nodded toward the heavily laden pack -horse. “Many of us settlers are going back with Colonel Clark. Better -join us, Hudson.” - -“Colonel Clark!” Pa exclaimed. “So you’re a colonel now, sir.” - -The colonel seemed not to have heard Pa’s exclamation. He shook his head -gravely. “This Indian situation is bad. They’re more stirred up than -ever this season.” - -Pa bristled. “There’s no Indians going to scare me off my land. I got a -good warm cabin and quite a few acres cleared. I’m staying.” - -Colonel Clark nodded and smiled. “I like your spirit, Hudson, but if I -were you, I’d take my family and crops up to Harrodsburg. Stay there -until these Indians quiet down a little.” - -Pa shook his head. “I mean to stay, sir. I got through last winter all -right. We’ve never been molested.” - -Colonel Clark put his hand on Pa’s shoulder. “We could use more brave -men like you out here, Hudson, but the Indians are really on the warpath -now. I can’t prove it, but I hear Hamilton’s paying the Indians for all -of the prisoners they deliver to him at Detroit—paying them well, too.” - -“Hamilton? Who’s he, sir?” - -“The British commander in charge of all the western country, stationed -at Detroit. I hear he’s got the Indians really aroused. Better take your -family to Harrodsburg for a while.” - -Pa scratched his ear. “Harrodsburg? That’s a far piece from here. Why -not to McClellan’s Fort?” - -The colonel looked grim. “Haven’t you heard, Hudson? Burned out by the -Indians early this year.” - -“Think it over, Hudson,” put in Tom Shelton. “Better stay alive in the -fort than dead on your claim. Or better yet, go back to Virginia with -us. We’ll be leaving in a few days, won’t we, Colonel?” - -Clark nodded. “As soon as I get the settlers together who want to go -back with me. I’ll be back in the spring.” - -Pa shifted from one foot to the other. “That’s good news, sir, that -you’ll be back. Thanks for your advice. I’ll think it over, but I’m not -going back to Virginia. We got to be getting along home now.” - -The colonel shook hands again with Pa and Jim. “Glad to have seen you, -Hudson. Good luck. Better get up to Harrodsburg as soon as you can.” He -and Shelton moved off along the trace. - -When the men had gone and Jim and Pa had been trudging along for a -while, Jim asked, “Pa, should we go to Harrodsburg?” - -Pa didn’t reply for so long Jim was afraid he had made him angry. -Finally Pa sighed and said, “I know your ma has been mighty upset since -Wahbunou disappeared. And Colonel Clark’s not one to be aroused without -cause. Maybe we ought to take our meat and provisions to the fort, at -least until this Indian scare blows over. I wouldn’t want anything to -happen to you and Ma.” - -“But I wouldn’t want to lose our farm, Pa.” - -“We wouldn’t lose it, Jim. No Indian’s going to squat very long on our -land. They’re a roving people. The worst they could do would be to burn -our cabin, and we could build another one, I guess. But I haven’t made -up my mind yet, Jim. Better not say anything to your ma about our -meeting with Colonel Clark today. No use getting her excited.” - -“No,” Jim agreed. “She’s upset enough as it is.” - -“If I decide we should go,” Pa continued, “she’ll be glad enough to -leave the farm and stay at the fort. So mind now, not a word to Ma.” - -Jim nodded. “I wouldn’t want to worry Ma.” - -On the way home they shot a squirrel and several wild turkeys, so when -they arrived at their cabin, they were well laden with the day’s -trophies. - -“Oh, Pa!” Ma cried, running out to meet them, her blond hair flying. “I -thought you’d never come.” She clapped her hands when she saw the deer -hanging from the limb. “Oh, a deer! Now we’ll have plenty of meat.” - -Pa smiled and pointed toward Jim. “He shot the deer, Ma. Got him on the -first shot. We have a squirrel and some turkeys too, so we’ve a lot of -work to do these next few days, jerking this meat.” - -The next morning was quite cold as a north wind had risen in the valley -during the night. But the Hudsons began working early anyway. Jim helped -Pa cut the deer meat into long strips and spread it to dry in the sun. - -Pa glanced toward the sun. “I think maybe we’ll have to smoke this meat -after all, Jim. This sun isn’t warm enough to cure meat.” - -Once the norther had passed, however, the weather did warm considerably; -Pa said they were feeling the last breath of summer. While father and -son worked with the meat, Ma made two new shirts for them and a linsey -woolsey dress for herself. She didn’t mention Indians again, but she -seemed to be uneasy as soon as night fell. - -On the evening they had the meat laid by, Pa said casually to his wife, -“Ma, I think we’ll take our provisions and go up to Harrodsburg for a -while.” - -Jim glanced quickly at his father to see if he had seen or heard -anything alarming, but Pa’s face showed nothing at all. - -Ma gasped in surprise. “To Harrodsburg, Pa? Do you mean to the fort? -Why?” - -“Well, I’ve noticed you seem mighty jumpy lately and I thought we’d take -our provisions and join the settlers at the fort for a while. It would -give you a rest and a chance to hear the news and talk to someone else -besides me and Jim. It would be a change.” - -Ma’s face glowed in anticipation and relief. “Oh, Pa, let’s do it. Let’s -go tomorrow before winter sets in and makes us prisoners here.” - -Pa shook his head. “I’m not sure we can go tomorrow. But we’ll start -packing.” - -Ma leaned forward in her chair and searched her husband’s face -anxiously. “What’s made you decide to leave our cabin, Pa? Have you seen -signs of Indians?” - -Jim looked at his father again as Pa replied almost too casually, -“Haven’t seen anything, Ma. But we’ve done the chores and the -harvesting, so we can leave the farm for a spell now. Just got a -hankering to see people.” - -Pa’s answer seemed to satisfy Ma Hudson because she was up early next -morning, and beginning to pack before Jim and Pa were awake. “I’ll take -my pots and the spinning wheel,” she said after breakfast, glancing -around their cabin. - -Pa shook his head. “You can’t take all that stuff, Ma. We’ve only one -horse, remember. We can’t put everything we own on Nellie’s back. -They’ll have cooking utensils at the fort and I’m sure some one will -have a spinning wheel. We’ll take just the corn, turnips and all of our -meat.” - -“May I take your drum, Pa?” put in Jim. “I’ll carry it. I can have fun -playing it for the other boys at the fort.” - -Pa hesitated, glancing up at the drum. Then he smiled. “I guess if you -want to be responsible for it, you may take the drum. But mind, you hang -on to it.” - -Finally they had the corn packed in two stout cloth sacks and hung on -one side of their horse’s saddle. Pa put the meat in a peddler’s pack -which he had brought from Virginia, with most of the turnips on top of -the meat. This pack he slung from the other side of the horse’s saddle. - -Ma had tied a change of clothes and moccasins for each of them in a -large square of cloth. - -When they were ready to leave, Ma sat on the horse, holding the pack of -clothes, while Pa led the horse with one hand and carried his trusty -Deckard with the other. Jim walked behind the horse, carrying Ma’s -rifle, the treasured drum and drumsticks. - -As they left their clearing Pa said, “We’ll come home as soon as we -can.” - -They trudged along silently, their moccasins and the horse’s hoofs, -swishing softly through the fallen leaves. Sometimes Ma hummed softly to -herself as if she were happy to be on the way to Harrodsburg. But Pa -gazed resolutely ahead. - -They heard no other sounds for a mile or so. - -Then without warning, they found themselves surrounded by a dozen -hideously painted Indians. Neither Pa nor Jim could raise their rifles -before the Indians had seized and securely bound them. - -In trying to raise his rifle, Jim had dropped his drum and sticks, but -he was too frightened to notice this. - -Ma screamed in terror as one of the Indians leaped upon her horse -Nellie, tied Ma’s hands and rode off with her into the woods. Two other -Indians tied leather thongs around Jim and Pa’s waists and began -dragging them along behind Ma’s captor. - -The rest of the band picked up the rifles, drum and sticks and followed -along, their whooping and yelling piercing the calm autumn stillness. - -Jim was terrified. He wondered if his father were; yet he could do -nothing but stumble along behind the Indian who kept jerking the leather -thong. - -Although Jim was frightened, he did not forget what Pa had said when -they found Wahbunou in the woods. Had it been a trick? Were these -Indians some of Wahbunou’s people? Was this the thanks the Hudsons -received for caring for him? - - [Illustration: uncaptioned] - - [Illustration: uncaptioned] - - - - - Chapter III - AN EXCHANGE AT THE SALT LICK - - -The Indians dragged Jim and his father rapidly through the woods until -the Hudsons thought they could go no farther. They were happy to reach a -small clearing where more Indians were waiting with their women, -children and extra horses. To Jim’s relief he saw his mother still -sitting on their old Nellie. - -During her ride, Ma’s usually neat blond hair had fallen down over her -shoulders. Half a dozen women were crowding around her, fingering her -hair and talking excitedly to each other. When they caught sight of -Jim’s towhead, they laughed and ran their fingers over his hair, too. - -Several men were going through the peddler’s pack of food. After one -look, they dumped the turnips on the ground. But the meat they carefully -repacked. - -Pa tried to smile reassuringly at Ma and Jim, but one of the men clapped -him on the head, picked him up as though he were a feather and dumped -him head down across a horse. Then the Indian climbed on behind him. In -a moment a second man had done the same to Jim. At once the band rode -off with their three white prisoners toward the north. - -About dusk they stopped for the night by a small stream. Pulling the -Hudsons from their horses, they tied Pa and Jim to one tree, Ma to -another. Several women began making fires and filling kettles with -water; while other women prepared supper. The children laughed and -scampered in and out of the stream. The men paid no attention to their -three white prisoners, but sat quietly along the bank of the stream, -talking in very low tones. - -Jim’s head ached so badly from his jolting, upside-down ride through the -woods that he could scarcely see. He was glad, though, that his parents -were still with him. He looked at the half-grown children playing around -the camp, expecting to see Wahbunou, but the boy was not among them. - -Ma Hudson was still so frightened she couldn’t talk, but she was not so -shaken up as Pa or Jim, because she at least had ridden upright. - -When supper was ready, one old woman brought scant servings of stew in -small gourds to the Hudsons, and three small dry corncakes. Ma wasn’t -able to eat a bite, but Pa and Jim found the stew surprisingly good. -They could have eaten another helping, but the woman did not bring them -any more. - -After the Indians had eaten their fill, the women banked the fires for -the night; men and boys relaxed on the ground. Poor Ma Hudson had either -fainted from fright or had fallen into an exhausted sleep. - -Pa turned his head slightly toward Jim and whispered, “I’m afraid it was -a trick, Jim. Putting Wahbunou with his injured shoulder near our -clearing, I mean. He probably reported we could be taken prisoner -easily, since we had no near neighbors to help us.” - -Jim glanced toward the Indian group, then at his father. “But, Pa, -Wahbunou isn’t with these Indians. All the men and boys are sitting -right over there together. Besides, we don’t even know if this is -Wahbunou’s tribe.” - -Pa looked at the group. Then he nodded his head. “You’re right, son. He -isn’t there.” - -Jim wriggled a bit trying to loosen the thongs which bound him, but with -no success. “I wonder what they’ll do with us now, Pa.” - -Pa tried to shake his dark hair away from his eyes. “Well, since they -didn’t kill us on the spot, I wonder if they intend to deliver us to -Hamilton in Detroit. You remember Colonel Clark said the British -commander there was paying the Indians to bring white prisoners to him.” - -Jim nodded. “Yes, I remember. But why, Pa? And where is this Detroit?” - -“You remember when I was in Harrodsburg last year I heard about Great -Britain waging a war with our countrymen back east. Now I think this -British Hamilton in Detroit is figuring on winning all our Kentucky -territory by having the Indians fight for him. They are to scare the -settlers into returning back home or to capture them for Hamilton. I’m -not sure where Detroit is, but I think it lies far to the north.” - -Jim glanced toward the Indians again. “Look, Pa. They have our rifles -and drum.” - -Two men were examining the rifles carefully, while the rest of the -Indians were passing drum and sticks from hand to hand. One of them -began to beat the drum with his hand, making a low rhythmical sound -similar to what Wahbunou had made in the Hudson’s cabin. - -Jim listened intently to the Indians’ conversation, but he couldn’t -understand anything. The words sounded like those Wahbunou had taught -him, yet they were somehow different, so that Jim couldn’t get even an -idea of what was said. - -At last they stopped talking and began rolling in their blankets to -sleep. Two men came over to the Hudsons, untied Pa and Jim, dragged them -to separate trees and secured them again. One Indian rolled in a blanket -beside Jim and the other beside Pa. But they offered no blankets to -them, nor to Ma Hudson now fifty feet away. - -The next morning they gave their prisoners a small amount of food. Ma -tasted it and ate a little, but Pa and Jim ate all the Indians gave -them. After breakfast, the women packed all the camp equipment together; -the men tied the Hudsons’ hands, set them upright on horses and -scrambled up behind them. - -The entire party rode rapidly toward the north and west, arriving late -in the afternoon at the broad Ohio River. The men chopped down poplar -trees and began building a raft. Jim and Pa Hudson watched in amazement -to see how quickly these Indians completed it. - -Then they ferried women, children and equipment across the river. While -some Indians guided the raft, others swam their horses to the far side. -When all were safely transported, the band set up their camp for the -night. - -For several days they continued in a northwesterly direction. On a -bright cool day they stopped at noon at a salt lick. The Hudsons -realized the Indians would stay here for a while, because the women dug -a trench, filling it with a great amount of firewood. - -When their fires had burned to a bed of red-hot coals, they drew water -from the lick and poured it into big salt kettles. These they placed -over the hot glowing coals. Some women kept adding firewood to keep the -salt water boiling; others began cooking over a second fire. - -Pa, Ma and Jim were permitted to walk about the salt lick as far as the -long leash around their waists permitted. But the Indians tied them to -trees far enough apart so they could not come close to each other. Pa -always would smile encouragingly at Ma and Jim, but he was never -permitted to touch them. Two Indians were stationed to watch the -prisoners, to prevent their escape. - - [Illustration: uncaptioned] - -The Indians wanted to build up their supply of salt, so the trench fires -under the kettles were not allowed to go out. Several women took turns -piling on firewood during the first night. - -In the evening one man brought Jim’s drum to him, gesturing for him to -play it. Jim played his loudest and best, executing ruffles and long -rolls for their entertainment. The Indians loved these sounds and his -skill with drumsticks, so kept him playing until quite late. - -The next afternoon a new group of Indians arrived at the lick; but they -kept a long distance away from the trench fires and did not offer to -mingle with the first band. They also set up camp and dug a long trench, -making a fire and filling their kettles with the brine. This salt lick -was evidently common ground, since neither Indian band paid attention to -the other. - -By nightfall, the women were able to scrape the first salt from the -kettles, spread it on rough boards to dry, and to fill the kettles with -fresh brine. - -Again the men had Jim play his drum for them. Soon they were swinging -their bodies and clapping their hands in time with the drum. Once by the -light of campfires, Jim thought he saw shadowy figures creeping close, -as if to listen to his playing. He felt uneasy about what they wanted, -but he continued to play even louder than before. - -In the morning, when the women finally decided they had enough salt for -the winter, they began packing their kettles and preparing to leave the -salt lick. A few minutes before the band was ready to go, Jim saw four -stalwart Indian men advancing rapidly toward them from the other camp. -They came near and began making a fire in front of Jim’s group. - -The men of Jim’s camp held a hurried consultation. Then one of them -stepped forward, raising his right arm high above his head. Immediately -the four visitors came up to him. He motioned for them to be seated; he -and his companions sat down, too. - -As they talked, Jim thought they must be arguing about some important -question. After a long conversation, one visitor rose and walked back to -his camp. He soon returned with a white man bound exactly like Pa -Hudson. - -At a signal from the group sitting on the ground, Jim’s guard suddenly -untied his leash and led him over to the strangers. - -More arguing went on, but the men of Jim’s camp kept shaking their -heads. Again one visitor returned to his camp, carrying back a -handsomely painted buffalo robe which he spread in front of the council. -Jim’s band examined the robe carefully and nodded their heads. One of -them called to the watching men. Immediately an Indian brought Pa -Hudson’s drum and sticks to the council. - -The visitors rose from the ground, handed their white prisoner and the -buffalo robe to Jim’s band, and motioned to Jim to pick up his drum and -sticks. As soon as Jim obeyed, one visitor picked up his leash and led -him toward the other camp. - -Frightened now, Jim looked back at his parents. Pa was alarmed and Ma, -tearful, was holding out her arms toward him, but both of them were -still tied to the trees. - -When Jim reached the new camp, several men and boys swarmed around him. -From their midst, a strangely familiar figure rushed over to Jim and -took off his leash. - -“Jim! Jim!” he cried. “Don’t you remember me? I’m Wahbunou.” - -Jim dropped his drum in surprise as Wahbunou gave him a friendly thump -on the shoulder. “Wahbunou!” he gasped. - -Wahbunou was so excited he could scarcely speak, but he had much to tell -his friend Jim. “My father and I persuaded Chief Minnemung to trade our -white prisoner for you. We couldn’t bear to see you remain with the -Shawnees. Then we Potawatomis made a fire in front of their camp to show -we wanted to counsel with them.” - -“Shawnees!” Jim cried out in terror, looking back toward his father and -mother. The Shawnees, however, were now mounted and moving away from the -salt lick. Jim could still see his parents riding on separate horses -with their Indian guards, and looking hopelessly toward the Potawatomi -camp where Jim had gone. - -Jim turned frantically to Wahbunou. “Wahbunou——my parents! Where are -they going? Don’t let the Shawnees take them away.” - -Wahbunou shook his head sadly. “I tried, Jim, I really did. I wanted to -have your parents traded to us along with you. But Chief Minnemung was -interested only in you and your drum. The drum helped me arrange the -trade, too.” - -“The drum? What do you mean, Wahbunou?” - -“The other night,” Wahbunou began, “we heard you playing your drum. It -was the first time my people, the Potawatomis, had heard such playing. I -knew it was not an Indian beating that drum, because I had heard you -play like that in your cabin; so I persuaded Chief Minnemung and my -father to creep close to the Shawnee camp to listen. It was then I saw -you and your parents. I realized you were prisoners of those Shawnees.” - -“But my parents, Wahbunou. Why aren’t they here with me?” - -Wahbunou continued patiently. “I asked Chief Minnemung to see if he -could get all of you transferred to us. I told him and all our -Potawatomi clan how good you were to me when I hurt my shoulder. I -pleaded, but Chief Minnemung wanted only you and your drum. Why Jim, he -traded his handsomest buffalo robe for your drum.” - -“But my parents will be unhappy separated from me,” Jim persisted. - -Wahbunou sighed and nodded. “I know, Jim. But I think no harm will come -to them now, because the Shawnees are on their way to Detroit to deliver -their prisoners to the great British Hamilton. He pays the Indians well -for white prisoners.” Wahbunou picked up the drum and sticks. “Come, -Jim, I want you to meet my family because soon we will be breaking -camp.” - -Wahbunou’s parents, brothers and sisters welcomed Jim heartily into -their group. His mother stroked Jim’s towhead and said, “Welcome, -friend. We Potawatomis will be good to you.” - -In a short time the Indians began packing to leave the salt lick. When -they were ready, Wahbunou said, “Jim, you are to ride with me because we -do not have extra horses.” He led Jim over to his horse. Jim recognized -it as the one he had tied in their lean-to alongside Nellie. - -The boys climbed up on the horse. “Now,” Wahbunou explained, “we are -going to our winter camp. It is still a long distance away. Hang on -tight, Jim, because we’ll be riding hard today.” - -Jim did as he was told, but with a heavy heart. Here he was—going to -some strange place with Wahbunou and the Potawatomis, while his mother -and father were prisoners of the Shawnees. He swallowed hard, wondering -if he would ever see them again. - - [Illustration: uncaptioned] - - - - - Chapter IV - WINTER WITH THE POTAWATOMIS - - -The Potawatomis rode hard for several days against a biting northwest -wind. Finally they stopped on the banks of the _Au Sable_ River, in a -wide valley protected by rolling hills. It was an ideal camp site -because the hills protected the Indians from bitter winter winds. - -Several families had already arrived. Wahbunou told Jim that these -people were members of another clan in his tribe. His clan, the Golden -Carp, always tried to return to this camp to hear news of their -relatives and to share in the tribe’s winter sports. - -The women began immediately setting up wigwams. These they made with -poles fastened to the ground in a circle, and the tops drawn together in -a cone. They covered this framework with their _aquapois_, or reed mats -made of cattail flags, to shut out snows and winter winds. - -The men rested a few days, then decided to go on a short hunting trip to -get fresh meat. Early in the morning of the hunt, the men painted their -faces with the vermilion, which Jim had first seen on Wahbunou’s face. - -“Wahbunou,” Jim said, “why are the men painting their faces?” - -Wahbunou turned from watching his father prepare for the trip. “They -always wear it, Jim, when they go hunting or riding for a war raid. The -day you found me in your country, I was on a hunting trip with my father -and the other men. But I became separated from the rest. I was trying to -catch up with them when I was brushed off my horse and broke my -shoulder.” - -“Do you usually hunt near our farm?” - -“Oh, no. That was the farthest south and east we had ever ridden. But -hunting wasn’t good in the places we knew. If you had not found me I -would have died, because my people did not miss me until they returned -to camp.” - -Jim looked puzzled. “But didn’t they hunt for you?” - -“Oh, yes, for several days. My father said they finally gave me up for -lost, thinking I had been killed by a bear.” - -“Then it wasn’t a trick that you happened near our clearing?” - -“Trick?” It was Wahbunou’s turn to look puzzled. “What do you mean, -Jim?” - -Jim hesitated. “My father wondered if you had been placed near our farm -to spy on us, and see if we could be easily captured.” - -“Jim! My people would not do that. We have not raided any cabins this -year. The prisoner we traded to the Shawnees had fired on Chief -Minnemung. We had to capture him. And anyway, Chief Minnemung wanted his -knife and gun.” - -While the boys talked the men finished their preparations and were ready -to go. Suddenly Chief Minnemung swung down from his horse and walked -toward Jim. “You ride with me today,” he said, putting his hand on Jim’s -shoulder. - -Wahbunou gasped in surprise because none of the Indian boys had been -asked to go on this hunting trip. Jim looked up at the tall, haughty -chief, magnificent in his painted buffalo robe; he started to say he -didn’t care to go. But the expression on Minnemung’s face told him this -was not an invitation but a command. - -“Yes—yes, sir,” he managed, wishing with all his heart he did not have -to accompany the chief. “What shall I do to get ready?” - -Chief Minnemung looked at him for a moment. “All right as you are. -Come.” Then he turned and stalked back to his horse. - -“It is a great privilege, Jim,” Wahbunou whispered, still amazed by the -chief’s order. - -Jim got on the horse behind the chief and the party of eighteen set out -for the hunt. After they had ridden a little way into the forest, they -separated into groups of two or three going in different directions. - -But Chief Minnemung and Jim went alone. As they rode along Jim noticed -that the chief was carrying a rifle like his father’s, and wearing a -long knife also like his father’s in a wampum belt which girded his -beautiful robe. - -Jim pointed to the rifle. “You have a gun like my father’s.” - -Chief Minnemung grinned a hideous grin through his streaked vermilion -paint. “_Shemolsea_,” he grunted. Then he patted the big knife and again -said, “_Shemolsea_.” - -Suddenly Chief Minnemung reined in his horse. Then he tried to sight his -rifle, but could not do it on the horse, so slid quietly to the ground. -Once again he tried to sight the rifle. Jim looked to see what the -chief’s quarry was. In the distance he saw a black bear, but it was too -far away to shoot. - -The Indian kept fumbling with the rifle and suddenly the sound of a shot -broke the stillness of the forest. Chief Minnemung shouted in triumph -and dropped the gun. He had fired the rifle. But his triumph was -short-lived, for his shout was answered by an unearthly moan. He had -wounded the bear which was now charging toward him. The old chief stood -frozen in his tracks when he realized the rifle shot had not killed the -bear. - -Jim slid off the horse, grabbed the rifle from the ground, reloaded it -and waited. The bear was coming nearer and Jim knew he must not miss his -aim. The wounded animal would kill them, if he did not kill it first. - -When the bear was only a few feet away, Jim fired. This time the aim was -deadly accurate, piercing the bear between the eyes. It fell in its -tracks. - -Chief Minnemung waited a few moments, then turned to Jim. “White boy, -Jim, you have saved Chief Minnemung’s life. I will not forget this -moment. Minnemung not know how to use _Shemolsea_ gun.” - - [Illustration: uncaptioned] - -The old chief was quite shaken and nervous, but with Jim’s help, he -managed to truss the bear and get it back to camp. When the women and -children saw Jim and Chief Minnemung returning with the big bear, they -ran out to meet them, yelling in delight. - -“Bear meat!” Wahbunou cried. “Now we’ll have a feast. Chief Minnemung -got a bear with _Shemolsea_ gun.” - -The chief was grinning in delight, but never a word did he say about -Jim’s shooting the bear. He took all the credit for the kill and did not -so much as glance at Jim. Jim would have liked to tell Wahbunou he had -killed the bear, but he was afraid Chief Minnemung would be angry, so he -said nothing. - -Late in the day the other men returned with squirrels and wild turkeys, -but no large game. For several days the camp feasted on bear meat, while -all the Indians praised their chief for bringing home such a prize. The -chief still kept silent about Jim. - -Soon winter came to the camp and the ground was covered with snow. Then -the children had lots of fun. Wahbunou showed Jim how to make a sled, -using buffalo ribs for the runners and hides for the seat. Jim found it -was a fine sled and had fun coasting down the hills with the other -children. - -One morning when the snow was packed very hard, Wahbunou said, “Come on, -Jim, we’re going to play Snow Snake.” - -“Snow Snake? What kind of game is that?” - -“We play it by teams with snow-snake poles,” Wahbunou explained. He took -Jim to a long level playground in the valley where the other children -had gathered. They chose sides, having six to a team. Then they drew -lots to see who would throw the first pole. Wahbunou drew the first -throw. - -He picked up the hickory pole, the ends of which were carved like the -head of a snake. He held it high and threw it with all his strength. The -pole shot through the air for quite a distance and fell to the ground -far from him. An older boy and girl served as scorekeepers and measured -the length of its flight. - -“Now, Jim,” Wahbunou urged, “do your best.” - -Jim stepped forward and tried to throw the pole as far as Wahbunou had, -but it fell far short. Jim sighed. “I’m no good at this game.” - -“You’ll soon learn, Jim,” comforted Wahbunou. - -Jim did learn to throw the snow-snake pole as well as the other boys. -Sometimes Chief Minnemung walked out to watch the children; he always -smiled when Jim threw it farther than the others. Quite often during the -winter the chief called Jim to his Wigwam, to play Pa Hudson’s drum for -him and sometimes for all the Indians. - -Jim grew tall during the winter, had plenty of food and was snug and -warm in the wigwam. He would have been happy with the Potawatomis if -only his parents had been with him. But often at night he could not -sleep, because he kept seeing his parents riding sadly away with the -Shawnees. - -After a long, cold winter, spring came again to the valley. One fine day -Wahbunou told Jim he had heard the men say they would be moving out of -winter camp the next morning. - -“But tonight, Jim,” Wahbunou went on, “we shall watch the dance of the -women. This dance celebrates the beginning of our summer wanderings. -Then we’ll break up into small bands again and we won’t see the rest of -our clan until next winter.” - -Jim looked doubtful. “The dance of the women, Wahbunou? What is that?” - -“Wait and see, Jim. Wait and see.” - -When the women came out of their wigwams in their ceremonial dresses, -Jim scarcely recognized any of them. They had greased their hair until -it shone in the glow of the campfires, painted their faces with -vermilion and put on long white chemises, over which they had strung all -the wampum necklaces they possessed. - -At their appearance four or five young men began singing and beating the -dance rhythm on their Indian drums; often they shook the _si si quoi_, a -sort of gourd containing dry seeds. The women danced in graceful rhythm, -not missing a single step. - -Jim thought the dancing beautiful, but he didn’t enjoy it as much as the -Indians, because he grew very sleepy long before the dance was over. He -didn’t know it would last well into the night. - -The next morning, however, the camp was awake early with everyone -getting ready to move. The women packed wigwam poles, cattail mats, -kettles, winter buffalo robes and the rest of the camping equipment. -Wahbunou’s mother packed Jim’s drum carefully among her belongings, so -that he wouldn’t have to carry it on the horse. - -All the Indians put on their summer clothes, one-piece garments of red -or blue cloth. Wahbunou gave Jim one of his blue cloth shirts, just like -the one he had been wearing when the Hudsons found him. Then everyone -mounted their horses. Once again Jim rode with Wahbunou. - -Chief Minnemung started northward with his group. Jim was to learn they -would be constantly on the move during the spring and summer, as the -Potawatomis had no lands of their own to cultivate. Frenchmen and some -neighboring Indian tribes called them squatters because of their habit -of moving in on land claimed by both the French and Indians. - -As they moved back and forth across the Illinois country searching for -game, wild berries and edible roots and herbs, spring gave way to -summer. Now the prairie grass was as high as Jim’s head and the woods -dense with foliage. - -One morning while Jim was helping Wahbunou’s mother skin some squirrels, -Wahbunou wandered away on some mission of his own. Wahbunou didn’t like -to work; he specially didn’t want to skin squirrels, so he always -managed to get away when his mother needed him. He was gone only a few -minutes, however, then came rushing back. “Jim. Jim, Chief Minnemung -wants to see you at once.” - -Jim put down a squirrel and looked up. “Chief Minnemung? Where is he? I -wonder what he wants.” - -Wahbunou pointed to a group of men under a tree. “He’s over there. See? -Talking with my father and some of the other men.” - -Jim turned to Wahbunou’s mother. “I’ll be back soon. Chief Minnemung -wants to speak to me.” Then he walked over toward the group of men. - -At his approach the men nodded and walked away from their chief. -Minnemung smiled at Jim and motioned for him to sit down beside him. - -“Jim,” he said, laying his hand on the boy’s arm, “I have been watching -you all winter and spring. Now I have come to a great decision.” - -Jim waited, wondering what the old man would say next. - -Chief Minnemung leaned toward the boy, his brown eyes stern and serious. -“I have decided to adopt you as my own son.” - -“Adopt me!” Jim gasped, a chill of fear passing over him. - -The old chief continued as though Jim had not spoken. “I lost my only -son two years ago with a fever. That fever took four of our most -promising young men. I have been lonely, very lonely in my wigwam. But I -have watched you all during the time you have been with us. I remember -also that you saved my life on that hunting trip when I did not know how -to use the rifle of the _Shemolsea_.” - -Chief Minnemung did not take his eyes from the trembling boy. “But the -greatest test of all you passed easily. You did not belittle me in front -of my clan by telling them that you killed the black bear.” - -Jim was startled. He hadn’t realized that Minnemung would have lost the -esteem of his clan if the Indians discovered Jim had really killed the -bear. - -“So you see,” Chief Minnemung continued, “you have proved yourself -worthy of adoption into the Potawatomi tribe as my son.” - -“Adoption,” Jim murmured. It was the last gift he wanted, because it -would mean he would be forever cut off from his own people. “But sir—” -he began. - -“We shall have the adoption ceremonies when the clans gather early in -the fall,” the chief said. “I just wanted to tell you of this honor -which awaits you.” Chief Minnemung nodded his head in dismissal. “That -is all.” - -Jim stumbled back; Wahbunou and his mother were still working with the -squirrel skins. - -“What’s the matter, Jim?” Wahbunou asked, when he caught sight of Jim’s -stricken face. “Was Chief Minnemung angry with you? And for what?” - -Jim shook his head. “No, he wasn’t angry. He wanted to tell me that he -is going to adopt me as his son in the fall.” - -Wahbunou dropped the skin he was cleaning. “Chief Minnemung is going to -adopt you!” Wahbunou clapped Jim on the back. “Why, that means you’ll be -the son of a chief.” - -Jim hung his head and said in a low voice, “Wahbunou, I don’t want to be -adopted by Chief Minnemung. And I don’t want to be a member of your -tribe.” - -Wahbunou stared at Jim, thinking he had not heard him correctly. “You -don’t want to be Chief Minnemung’s son?” - -Now Jim’s blue eyes were misty with tears. “No, Wahbunou. You and your -people have been very kind to me, but I want my own people. I hope to -find my father and mother. Don’t you remember that you didn’t want to -live with us?” - -Wahbunou nodded slowly. “But, Jim, you don’t know where your father and -mother are. Nor do I. I only know they were prisoners of the Shawnees. -And they live far to the east. We Potawatomis do not mingle with them.” - -Jim’s lips trembled as he said, “If they’re still alive, I’ll find them -some day, Wahbunou. I wouldn’t be happy being a real Potawatomi.” - -Wahbunou sighed and was silent for a while. Finally he said, “Jim, I do -understand that you want to be with your own people. Believe me. But -Chief Minnemung has spoken. His word is law with us. There is nothing -that my father or I can do to prevent your adoption.” - - [Illustration: uncaptioned] - - - - - Chapter V - THE LONG-KNIVES - - -Several days later Chief Minnemung sent word around that everyone was to -prepare for the annual trading trip to Cahokia. Soon the women were busy -sorting the fur pelts they had accumulated during the winter and spring, -and tying them in separate bundles according to kind. When all were -sorted, Jim was surprised to see how many bundles there were. - -“This Cahokia, Wahbunou? What is it?” Jim asked. He and Wahbunou were -mounted on the horse ready to start on the journey. - -Wahbunou smiled. “Cahokia is a French village a long way from here. We -go there every year about this time. The French have a trading post and -we’ll trade our furs for many supplies which we need.” - -“What supplies, Wahbunou?” - -“I’m not sure what we’ll get this trip, but sometimes we get food or -blankets. I think Chief Minnemung may want to trade for guns and some -powder. The French are our friends; we always stay a while in their -village. Then we’ll move on for the annual council of our tribe.” - -A shadow crossed Jim’s face at mention of the council, because Minnemung -had told him the adoption ceremonies would take place there. Suddenly a -plan of escape from the Potawatomis occurred to him. Perhaps he might be -able to join the French while trading was going on; they might even help -him find his parents. But he said nothing to Wahbunou. - -The Potawatomis had been wandering southeast, but now they turned about -and began riding in a westerly direction, bearing a little to the north. -It was so warm they didn’t try to cover many miles in a day. Sometimes -they stayed several days in their overnight camps. This was the season -for ripe berries, so the Indians stopped often to feast on wild -raspberries or dewberries. - -One afternoon they happened upon a large berry patch bordering a heavy -forest. Everyone ate his fill of berries while the women and children -gathered some in their kettles and gourds to take with them. Wahbunou -told Jim they would be leaving the forests now and riding through wide -meadows of prairie grass. There would not be another opportunity to pick -berries this summer. - -The two boys tethered their horse, scrambling farther and farther into -the brambles away from the rest of the Indians and seeking larger and -larger berries. All at once Jim looked back and saw the Potawatomis -riding away without them. - -“Wahbunou!” he cried. “Look! Minnemung and the rest are leaving.” - -Wahbunou glanced toward the disappearing group. “In a minute, Jim. We -can catch them easily. Let’s get just a few more berries.” He pointed to -a heavily laden bush nearby. “Let’s get those, then we’ll go.” - -Jim glanced uneasily at the band of Indians now almost out of sight in -the tall prairie grass. He didn’t want to be left in this trackless -ocean of grass. “We’d better go, Wahbunou.” - -Wahbunou tossed his head and laughed. “I can catch them easily, Jim. My -horse isn’t far away and he’s faster than any save Chief Minnemung’s.” -Then he turned again to the berries. The boys had been stuffing -themselves with the delicious fruit for perhaps ten minutes, when -Wahbunou’s horse suddenly began pawing the ground. Wahbunou cocked his -head to one side and listened. - -“I hear the sound of many feet, Jim. I think it’s the feet of many men.” -Now it was Wahbunou’s turn to be alarmed. - -Jim frowned. “I don’t hear anything, Wahbunou. Let’s be on our way.” - -“You wait,” cautioned Wahbunou, seizing his horse’s bridle. “I don’t -hear any horses’ hoofs, just the sound of men.” He led his horse to the -edge of the berry patch, where he could see the broad expanse of -prairie. The grass was almost as tall as Jim’s head, it rippled -rhythmically in the wind, making it look like waves of the ocean. It had -a sort of singing sound which Jim had never heard before. - -“I hear only a sort of singing,” Jim said. “I think it’s the wind in -this grass.” - -Wahbunou put his finger to his lips. “Shh, Jim! They’re coming.” Then he -signaled to his horse to lie down at the edge of the grass. - -The horse obeyed immediately and none too soon either. The next moment -the boys saw a band of white men marching out of the forest. And they -kept coming, more men than Wahbunou could count. Just before they -plunged into the thick prairie grass the boys could see they had long -rifles and wore sparkling long knives in their belts. The sun shining on -the knives made them visible even at this distance. - -“_Shemolsea!_” gasped Wahbunou, dropping to his knees. - -Jim also dropped down into the grass and turned to Wahbunou. “Wahbunou,” -he whispered, “what do you mean by _Shemolsea_? I remember you said that -word the day my father found you in the woods. And Chief Minnemung said -his rifle was _Shemolsea_.” - -Wahbunou whispered, “_Shemolsea_—Long-Knife. Men who carry long knives. -You know your father had one. He is _Shemolsea_.” - -“Oh! You mean all of us Kentucky settlers are Long-Knives?” Jim started -to stand up, but Wahbunou pulled him down. “Do you want them to kill -you, Jim?” he whispered in terror. - -“Why, they wouldn’t kill us. Maybe I might know some of them.” Jim -raised up to take another look at the men. Their column had turned -southwest and Jim could no longer see their faces. There were so many -men Jim was afraid to call out to them. “I wonder who they are and where -they’re going,” he muttered, half to himself. - -Wahbunou was whispering, “As soon as they’ve gone, we’ll have to ride -fast and tell Chief Minnemung about the many, many Long-Knives we’ve -seen.” - -“I think I’ll go and join them,” Jim cried, scrambling up from the tall -grass. - -Wahbunou tripped him and he fell headlong. “No, Jim. That you cannot do. -Chief Minnemung would kill me if anything happened to you. You must ride -back with me.” - -Wahbunou looked so frightened that Jim hesitated. He wouldn’t want -Wahbunou punished by Chief Minnemung; nor would he want those -Long-Knives, whoever they were, to attack the little Potawatomi band. -For a few minutes he was silent. Then he said, “Wahbunou, I’ll go back -with you, if you’ll promise not to tell anyone we saw these Long-Knives. -Promise?” - -“But maybe they’ll attack us,” Wahbunou replied doubtfully. - -“Aw, those men aren’t marching after a small band of Indians,” Jim -replied. “Is there any town near here?” - -“Kaskaskia is over that way.” Wahbunou pointed in the general direction -the column of men had taken. “It’s another French settlement. We do not -go through it on the way to Cahokia. Cahokia is north.” - -Jim shook his head. He still wondered where those Long-Knives were -going—his Long-Knives. Why, they were his people! Suddenly he thought of -another plan of escape, this time without involving Wahbunou. Here was -his real chance. He turned to tell the Indian boy, but Wahbunou was on -his feet signaling to his horse. - -“Come, Jim. The Long-Knives have gone. I think we can ride now.” -Wahbunou mounted his horse and Jim climbed on behind him. - -As they rode through the prairie grass away from the column of -Long-Knives, Jim said, “Wahbunou, I can’t go through with it. I can’t -let Chief Minnemung adopt me into the Potawatomi tribe. My countrymen -are close at hand. I can join these white Long-Knives and perhaps they -will know something of my father and mother.” - -Wahbunou trembled as he cried out, “Jim! You must not leave me. You must -go back to Chief Minnemung. He will kill me if I return without you.” - -Jim became thoughtful; then he said, “Wahbunou, it wouldn’t be your -fault if I left the camp tonight.” - -Wahbunou gulped. “You wouldn’t dare do that, Jim.” - -Jim nodded. “Wouldn’t I? You did. You stole away from us and went back -to your people.” - -The Indian boy urged his horse to a faster pace. “Yes, Jim, I did. My -people were going to a place I knew and I had a horse. You wouldn’t take -my horse?” - -“No, Wahbunou, I wouldn’t steal your horse. But you must promise not to -tell anyone about seeing the Long-Knives. I’ll steal away at night. I’ll -find those men.” - -“But, Jim, you’d get lost in the dark. And Chief Minnemung would hear -you. Indians have sharp ears.” - -“I’ll have the stars to guide me. My father taught me to tell direction -by the stars. The Long-Knives certainly won’t march all night. I’ll find -them, never fear.” Jim clutched Wahbunou more firmly. “Now promise me—no -word about the Long-Knives.” - -Wahbunou gulped and finally said, “It shall be as you say. Wahbunou will -say no word.” - -Thus the two boys made a solemn pact riding back to the Potawatomi band. - -When they finally arrived, the Indians had pitched camp in a small -thicket adjoining the prairie. It was almost dark and the women had -supper ready. Strangely enough no one had missed them, so the boys -didn’t have to explain their absence. Evidently the Indians had neither -heard nor seen the marching column of men, because they seemed as -carefree as usual. - -After supper, as the Indians sat around the campfire, Chief Minnemung -suddenly took a notion to have Jim play his drum. “Jim,” he said, “get -your drum and play for us.” - -Nothing could have pleased Jim more. If his Long-Knives were within -hearing distance and heard the roll of the drum, they might investigate -the sound. He didn’t want to see his Indian friends hurt, but he did -wish the Long-Knives would appear and take him with them. He rose -quickly. “Yes, Chief Minnemung, I’ll be glad to play for you.” - -Wahbunou’s mother had to unpack the drum from her housekeeping -belongings, but she did not protest because Chief Minnemung had ordered -Jim to play. - -Jim beat the drum with all his might, executing some long rolls and -difficult ruffles. Now and then he would toss a drumstick into the air -and catch it again without missing a beat. At this the Indians grinned -in glee at his skill. - -Jim played until he was exhausted, all the while hoping to see the -Long-Knives coming to the camp. But no one came, and nothing broke the -stillness of the summer night save the beating of his drum. - -At last Chief Minnemung signaled for him to stop playing. Immediately -all the Indians lay down to sleep. Wahbunou’s mother forgot to pack -Jim’s drum away, so he put it carefully down on the ground between him -and Wahbunou. Then he lay down and pretended to sleep. - -He listened for a long time until he felt sure everyone was asleep; then -he took his drum and began to crawl slowly from his place on the ground. -But Wahbunou was not asleep. At Jim’s first move he whispered, “Jim, are -you leaving?” - -Jim turned and patted Wahbunou’s shoulder. “Shh! Yes. Thanks, Wahbunou. -I’ll never forget you.” - -Wahbunou sighed but did not reply, so Jim felt sure his secret was safe -with his Indian friend. Wahbunou would not fail him. - -He continued to inch along the ground with the drum, stopping every few -feet to see if any of the other Indians had awakened; but save for -Wahbunou, the camp was silent. - -When he was certain he was far enough away not to be seen, Jim stood up; -he fastened his drum and drumsticks to the belt encircling his long blue -shirt, and looked at the sky. It was a beautiful summer night and the -sky was filled with stars. - -He studied them for a few minutes until he located the North Star and -the Big Dipper. Then he began walking southwest, the way the Long-Knives -had marched in the afternoon. Except for twinkling stars, the night was -very black, because there was no moon. - -Jim trudged along and was soon beyond the little thicket, which broke -the vast prairie. All through the long night, he made his way through -the high prairie grass, hearing no sound save the singing of the wind. - -When morning finally came, he found himself in the midst of a trackless -ocean of grass, with no sign of any Long-Knives, no telltale path -through the grass or sign of the Indians’ camp. There was only singing, -swaying prairie grass, stretching toward the horizon in all directions. - -Jim sighed, but walked steadily on, now and then scaring up a flock of -prairie chickens which rose squawking into the air. Taking his bearings -from the sun now, he knew he was going west. - -The sun grew unbearably hot, making Jim very thirsty, but there was no -water anywhere. Now and then he would look back to see if the Indians -could be pursuing him. But he needn’t have worried. His slight figure -left no trail through the prairie grass. - -As the day wore on he became thirstier, and very hungry. He began to -wonder if he had made a mistake to leave the Indians and try to find a -band of strange men in this trackless country. Late in the afternoon he -thought he saw a line of trees in the distance. He couldn’t be sure, -because this steaming prairie grass played tricks with his eyes and he -was afraid he saw a mirage. If he could only make it to those trees, he -would lie down in the shade and rest a bit. - -The trees proved to be real enough, and when Jim reached them he fell -into their cool shade and fell asleep. - -He was awakened after dawn by someone prodding his foot and a rough -voice saying, “Get up, boy. Who are you? Where did you come from?” - -Jim opened his eyes and saw two men standing over him. They were dressed -in dirty, torn buckskins, with long knives hanging to their belts. The -taller man was prodding him with a rifle. - -Jim sprang up, his eyes shining. “Oh, you’re the _Shemolsea_—the -Long-Knives.” - -“Never mind who we are,” the man said crossly. “Who are you in that -Indian outfit? What are you doing here?” - -“I’m Jim Hudson. I escaped from the Indians last night and I’ve been -trying to find you all day.” - -“A likely story,” muttered the shorter man. “Probably you’re some spy -sent out by the Indians.” - -Jim shook his head. “No, sir. I saw a big band of Long-Knives yesterday -and I’ve been trying to find them.” - -“Let’s take him to Colonel Clark,” the shorter man suggested. - -Jim’s eyes sparkled. “Clark, did you say? George Rogers Clark? Is he -red-haired?” - -The tall soldier spoke again. “Say, boy, you know too much. Come on, get -going.” - -As they walked single file through the woods, they made Jim walk between -them. After stumbling over fallen trees and brambles for about a mile, -they came upon a group of ragged men sitting and standing in the dense -shade along a river. - -“Colonel Clark, sir,” began the tall soldier, “we’ve found a white boy; -he says he was a prisoner of the Indians. But he knows too much. Must be -some trick here.” - -A ragged, commanding figure with red hair turned from the men and walked -over to Jim. His stern, hazel eyes seemed to penetrate Jim’s whole body -as he said, “Well, lad, who are you? What are you doing here?” - -Jim was so excited he could scarcely talk. “Colonel Clark, I’m Jim -Hudson. I don’t suppose you remember me, sir, but I remember your red -hair. I met you late last year with my father at Coon Hollow. We had -been hunting and had bagged a deer. You advised my father to go to -Harrodsburg until the Indian scare was over.” Jim looked hopefully at -the colonel. - -Colonel Clark seemed to be turning something over in his mind. Finally -he smiled. “I remember. But how do you happen to be out here in the -Illinois country?” - -Then Jim told the long story of how he and Pa and Ma had been captured -by the Shawnees on the way to Harrodsburg; how later he had been traded -to the Potawatomis, with whom he had spent the winter. When he was -telling of seeing the column of Long-Knives, Colonel Clark interrupted -him. - -“Just a minute, boy. Did the Indians with you see us?” - -Jim shook his head. “No, sir, only Wahbunou. We had stayed behind the -rest to eat more berries. Wahbunou promised me he would not tell he had -seen the Long-Knives.” - -Colonel Clark looked puzzled. “That’s hard to believe, Jim. I wouldn’t -trust an Indian not to warn his people of an army of white men near -them.” - -The tall soldier scowled, as did several others. But no one spoke a -word. - -“But, sir,” Jim replied, “we saved Wahbunou’s life, so he promised not -to tell about the Long-Knives. He knew of my plan to escape.” Jim -explained how the Hudsons found Wahbunou near their clearing and of -Chief Minnemung’s decision to adopt Jim. “That’s why I ran away, sir. I -didn’t want to be a Potawatomi. I hope to find my parents, but I don’t -know if they’re alive.” - -George Rogers Clark nodded. “I trust they are, Jim, and I can’t blame -you for not wanting to be a Potawatomi. For the present you’ll go with -us and be a part of my volunteer army. We’re crossing the river tonight -and marching on Kaskaskia.” - -“I see you have a drum. Perhaps we’ll need a drummer before this night -is over.” He turned and motioned to the tall soldier. “This is Simon -Kenton, Jim. You are to go with him and do whatever he says.” - -“Yes, sir.” - -Simon Kenton inclined his head toward the river bank. “Come on, Jim. -We’ll have a look at Kaskaskia from this side of the river. Have a care -though. We don’t want any of those Frenchmen over there to see us.” - -As Jim and Kenton approached the river’s edge, Kenton dropped to the -ground. “We have to crawl now, Jim, so’s we can see without being seen.” - -At the edge of the bank they could see the little town of Kaskaskia. It -lay in a kind of amphitheatre of woods and bluffs. They could also see -the fort with a stockade built around it, the steeple of a church, and -some thatched roofs and stone houses shining in the afternoon sun. - -“Gee, it’s bigger than the settlements I’ve seen in Virginia!” Jim -exclaimed. - -“Yep,” Kenton replied. “This is one of the oldest and best of the French -villages. I’ve heard it called the Paris of the West. See that British -flag flying above the fort? Tomorrow, God willing, it’ll be flying the -American flag. - -“You see, Jim, Colonel Clark has to take this country from the British -to make our Kentucky settlers safe from Indian attack. Commander -Hamilton at Detroit has been stirring up the Indians against our -people.” - -“Yes, sir, I know. I think that’s how my parents and I happened to be -captured.” - -For a while they watched the town. Nothing unusual was going on, so -Simon Kenton told Jim he thought no one there suspected the presence of -Clark and his army directly across the river. Then they crawled back to -the main group of soldiers. - -Jim didn’t think the men in this motley, exhausted army could capture a -town during the night. Several of them had taken off their shoes and -were nursing their painful, swollen feet. They were suffering from scald -foot, a wilderness malady brought on by dampness, heat and too much -marching. - -Jim wondered if they could put on their shoes when it came time to cross -the river. All of them were hungry besides, as they had eaten nothing -but berries for many days. Could such an army capture a well-fed town -like Kaskaskia? - - [Illustration: uncaptioned] - - - - - Chapter VI - ON TO KASKASKIA - - -When night fell, Colonel Clark ordered his men to march. Led by two -soldiers who had been scouting the woods all afternoon, they followed -the bank of the Kaskaskia River until they came to a farmhouse. Here -several boats were moored at the river bank. Clark ordered some of his -men to surround the house and others to seize the family living in it. - -A very frightened Frenchman, his wife and their several children came -out of the house, holding their hands high in the air. The soldiers -brought the father to Colonel Clark who began questioning him about the -town of Kaskaskia. - -The man said the town had been expecting an attack from the direction of -the Mississippi River. This alarm had died down, he thought, because now -there was no extra militia at Kaskaskia. He also said most of the -Indians loitering there had left and gone to Cahokia. - -Jim shivered at the mention of Cahokia and wondered if Chief Minnemung -and his Potawatomis had arrived there, or if they were still searching -for him. - -When Clark got the information that the town was quiet, he permitted the -French family to return to their home, and ordered his men to start -ferrying the army across the river. Since he had well over a hundred -men, they must make many trips back and forth in the few boats on the -river bank. Jim and Simon Kenton were to go with the first group. - -As Jim climbed into one boat, he stumbled over a boy about his own age -who was trembling and cowering in the bottom. Kenton, just behind Jim, -pointed his rifle at the boy. “Who are you?” he asked gruffly. “What are -you doing here?” - -The frightened boy did not reply but stared up at the rifle. - -“Come, boy,” Kenton repeated, “what are you doing here?” - -The boy scrambled to his feet and stammered, “I——I was just going home. -I came from Kaskaskia this morning in this boat. I was hunting beeswax -for Father Gibault. He needs more beeswax for the church candles. When I -saw all your men I hid here. I hoped you would go away so I could go -home.” - -Kenton sneered. “A likely story. You’ve been spying for de Rochblave no -doubt.” - -“Oh, no, sir. I only know the commandant by sight, sir. I tell you true, -I was hunting beeswax. And I found a bee tree, too.” - -“Well, you’ll go back as our prisoner. Sit down in the boat.” Simon -Kenton turned to Jim. “Sit beside him, Jim, and keep your eye on him. -Don’t let him get away.” - -“Yes, sir,” Jim replied, making room for the boy. - -The boat was now filled and the men began rowing across the river toward -Kaskaskia. Jim could feel the boy trembling beside him. He whispered, -“Don’t be afraid. Colonel Clark will see that no harm comes to you. -What’s your name? I’m Jim Hudson.” - -“Willie——Willie Watson,” the boy replied. - -As soon as all soldiers were ferried across the river and assembled in -their respective companies, Colonel Clark stepped out in front of them. -It was too dark to see this erect, commanding man, but there was no -mistaking the stern authority in his voice. - -“Men,” he said, “our first objective is to take this town. By seizing -Kaskaskia, we’ll be protecting our countrymen in the western country. -You all know the British have been inciting the Indians to war against -our settlers. By controlling this French settlement, we’ll cut off all -supplies from New Orleans and the west to Hamilton at Detroit, so -tonight it’s win or lose everything. Now, I’ll make three divisions of -these companies. Captain Bowman.” - -“Yes, sir,” and Captain Bowman stepped forward. - -“You are to command one division. Take your men to the far quarter of -the town. Captain Helm, command the second, and take your men to the -other end of town. I’ll lead the third division.” - -The men assembled quickly according to orders. Jim and Willie were -assigned to Captain Bowman’s division. - -“Kenton,” Colonel Clark continued, “you’re to go with me. Now, men, if -we take the fort and capture de Rochblave without resistance, you’ll -hear three shots. The shots will be my signal of victory. Then all of -you are to yell and shout as loudly as you can. And Jim,” Colonel Clark -peered into the darkness, “where’s Jim Hudson?” - -“Here, sir.” - -“When the men start yelling, you beat your drum as hard as possible. Run -through the town from one end to the other beating it. That will help -make the French think we have a large army. Keep beating it. Do you -hear?” - -“Yes, sir.” - -“If any of you men speak French, step forward.” - -Several soldiers stepped forward from the ranks. - -Willie whispered to Jim, “I can speak French, too.” - -“Step forward then,” Jim urged, so Willie stepped out with the others. - -“After I give the signal,” Clark continued, “you are to run through the -streets telling the people in French that the Long-Knives have taken -Kaskaskia. And tell them to stay inside their homes. If they venture -outside they will be shot.” Clark’s voice became sterner than before. -“Now then, not one of you is to talk to any of the inhabitants. I want -no conversation with them. Is that clear?” - -“Yes, sir,” the men answered in chorus. - -Immediately Colonel Clark set out, leading his own division through -dark, silent streets toward the fort. The two captains started with -their men for the assigned positions. For Jim and Willie it was an eerie -experience to march through the dark streets, then wait—wait in silence -for the hoped-for signal. - -After what seemed an endless time to the boys, three rifle shots rang -out from the fort. These meant that Colonel Clark and his men had -captured Commandant Philip de Rochblave and his fort without any -resistance. - -Then what yelling and screaming went up in all parts of the town. Those -men speaking French tried to out-yell other Long-Knives shouting Clark’s -orders in English. As Willie ran through the streets shouting his -orders, Jim kept beside him, beating his drum with all his might. - -Jim thought he’d better keep track of Willie so he wouldn’t escape. -Willie, however, showed no signs of wanting to leave the Long-Knives, -but kept shouting Clark’s orders over and over. They kept up this din -all night and were so excited they never thought of sleep. - - [Illustration: uncaptioned] - -The next morning the streets were deserted save for Clark’s troops now -doing guard duty in various parts of town. Jim and Willie were still -together and Jim was surprised to see what a beautiful place Kaskaskia -was. - -In the center of town was a large grass-covered square, with narrow -streets leading out from it. From here Jim saw the American flag was -indeed flying from the old fort. There were a few stone houses here and -there, but most of them were wooden with pointed, thatched roofs and -chimneys at either end. - -While Jim was admiring the town, someone called, “Come on, boys. -Breakfast is ready.” - -Jim and Willie didn’t need to be called the second time. They dashed to -join the men just sitting down to breakfast; it had been prepared by -spies Colonel Clark had sent into town ahead of his troops. - -Meantime the terror-stricken residents of Kaskaskia remained indoors, -not knowing what was to become of them. Father Pierre Gibault asked -Colonel Clark if the people could assemble in the church to pray. They -feared they were to be separated and taken away by Clark’s soldiers. -Clark granted Father Gibault’s request and the people walked solemnly -into the church. - -Some time later Colonel Clark spoke to them, telling them not to be -afraid. He said the king of France had joined the Americans against the -British and now they could all work together. He asked only that the -residents of Kaskaskia swear allegiance to the Long-Knives, who -represented the Continental Congress and Virginia. - -Immediately the gloom and fear of the people melted away. They rang the -old church bell in jubilation, giving thanks for their freedom, weeping -and laughing for joy. - -No one was more astounded at this news than little Willie Watson. He -clapped his hands and turned handsprings down the street. He had -expected to be thrown into chains and taken far away. Now he was as free -as Jim. He looked at his friend. “Colonel Clark is a wonderful man,” he -said, his dark eyes shining. - -Jim nodded. “Willie, were you really hunting beeswax across the river?” - -“Of course I was, Jim. We have no wax for the church candles, so I went -to hunt a bee tree. Now I’ll get someone to go with me to get the honey -and wax.” - -“Are you responsible for the candles, Willie?” - -“Not entirely, Jim. I am a ward of Father Gibault and I help him in any -way I can. - -“My father was a river man on the Ohio. He worked for Boynton, Wharton -and Morgan Company. They used to send boatloads of merchandise from -Philadelphia down the Ohio and up the Mississippi Rivers to their store -here. My father made many trips for them, but he was drowned in 1772. So -Father Gibault found a house for my mother and me next door to him.” - -“Then you live with your mother?” - -“Yes, I do. She sews for some of the wealthy people and mends for Father -Gibault. In the winter I work for Monsieur Gabriel Cerré.” - -Jim’s face was sad for a moment. “My mother was a good seamstress, too.” - -Willie was puzzled. “Say, where are your mother and father? How do you -happen to be with Clark’s army?” - -Then Jim told Willie about the last time he had seen his parents and -what had happened to him since. - -“That’s too bad, Jim,” Willie said. “Of course Indians do sometimes kill -their prisoners, but it’s likely your parents are still alive. What are -you going to do now?” - -Jim sighed. “I hope I’ll find them some day. Maybe Colonel Clark will -have a job for me. I’d like to stay with him and his men.” - -Willie smiled. “If he doesn’t, Jim, I think I can get you a job working -with me. Monsieur Cerré is a big merchant here and needs quite a few -people in the fall. He’s away from Kaskaskia right now.” - -Jim nodded. “I may ask you later, Willie, because I have to find -something to do.” - -“Guess I’d better go home now, Jim. Will you come home with me?” - -“No thanks, Willie. I have to see what Colonel Clark has in mind for -me.” - -“Well, good-bye, for now,” and Willie ran happily down the street toward -Father Gibault’s house. - -Jim walked slowly over to Colonel Clark’s headquarters. When he arrived -Captain Bowman and a few French citizens were just leaving. Clark was -giving them last-minute instructions. - -“Captain Bowman,” he was saying, “use all your persuasive powers and -those of these good citizens,” he nodded toward the Frenchmen, “to get -the people of Cahokia to swear allegiance to our Continental Congress. -No violence, though.” - -“Yes, sir,” Captain Bowman replied, saluting smartly. “I think I can win -them over with the help of these men.” Then he and the Frenchmen left -headquarters for their ride to Cahokia. - -After they had gone Colonel Clark noticed Jim standing in the room. -“Hello, Jim. What is it?” - -“I wonder, sir,” he began, “if you have a job for me. You see I have no -home here, as Willie has.” - -Colonel Clark frowned for a moment and then smiled. “To be sure, I have -a job for you, Jim. You can be my personal messenger. Now that we have -won Kaskaskia, I have to deal with the Indian tribes camped in this -neighborhood.” - -“Yes, sir.” - -“Are you a good penman, Jim?” - -“I can write a good hand, sir. My mother used to be a governess in -Virginia and she taught me to read, write and figure.” - -“Good. I have a lot of letters to write and you can help me with them, -too. You’ll sleep here at headquarters and eat with my men. Tomorrow -you’ll have plenty of work to do.” - -“Oh, thank you, sir.” Jim’s heart was singing. All would be well with -him if he could stay with Colonel Clark. - - [Illustration: uncaptioned] - - - - - Chapter VII - NO ADOPTION - - -George Rogers Clark’s sudden appearance in the French settlements with -his army threw the Indians camping there into a panic. They thought the -army larger than it was and expected to be attacked momentarily. Some -tribes asked their French friends in Kaskaskia and Cahokia what they -should do. - -The French, who were now firm friends of the Long-Knives, advised them -to call upon Clark and sue for peace. Then these same Frenchmen reported -to Clark that the Indians had come to them for advice. - -Colonel Clark was quick to take advantage of the Indians’ confusion. He -prepared a letter to be sent to the tribes, telling them to lay down -their tomahawks and ally themselves with him, or to fight like men for -the English. Jim Hudson made several copies of this letter, which Clark -sent by him and other messengers to the different tribes. - -The Kickapoos and Piankeshaws signed treaties immediately with the -Long-Knives. Other tribes, however——the Chippewas, Ottawas, Potawatomis, -Sacs and Foxes——came into Cahokia and demanded a council with Clark. -They wanted to see the chief Long-Knife and to hear what he had to say. - -Colonel Clark sent word to them that he would attend their council, but -he took his time about going to Cahokia to meet with them. He thought it -would be well for the Indians to wait on him. After a while he took Jim -Hudson, some of his officers and many of his soldiers to Cahokia, which -had sworn allegiance to him through Captain Bowman. - -Clark’s new headquarters were in a house beside the Cahokia River. In a -few days a band of Winnebagos, often called Stinkers by the French, -pitched camp in a Frenchman’s yard, just across the road from Clark’s -headquarters. - -When Jim Hudson saw the Indians he was frightened and said to Colonel -Clark, “I don’t think those Stinkers should camp so near you, sir. They -might attack us. We don’t have many soldiers here.” - -The colonel’s eyes twinkled. “How right you are, Jim. I think they have -something like that in mind. Perhaps they want to kidnap me so I can’t -appear at the council.” - -Jim shivered. “Oh, sir! Can’t you recall some of the men you have -stationed around the town?” - -“Jim, you have the mark of a military man,” Colonel Clark replied. -“That’s what I intend to do, but I don’t want these Stinkers to know -about my reinforcements. You go to my captains now and tell them to send -several guard details to my headquarters as soon as it is dark. Tell -them to come in one by one at the rear.” - -“Yes, sir,” Jim replied, glad to have an errand and to know they were to -have more soldiers at headquarters. He dashed out to find Captain Helm -and Simon Kenton. - -That evening fifty guards began filtering into headquarters, some to -conceal themselves in the house, others to stand in the darkness -outside. Although Clark walked alone about the yard, nothing happened. - -The next night the guards again took up their same stations. Colonel -Clark stayed up late, supposedly working on reports. - -Jim couldn’t sleep, so he went to the window and stared out into the -night. About one o’clock shots were fired across the river. In a few -minutes Jim saw some skulking figures in the headquarters yard. He -wanted to scream, but Clark himself gave the alarm. - -Immediately the guards appeared from all sides of the building. They -succeeded in capturing three of the Stinkers and hustled them into -headquarters. The shots and ensuing racket awakened the town; some of -the citizens hurried to headquarters to see what was the matter. - -To Jim’s great surprise, the colonel asked these Frenchmen what -punishment they thought these Stinkers deserved. In one voice they said -these Indians should be put in irons. Then and there, Clark made this an -order. Thus he maneuvered so that the French suggested the punishment -for the Indians. - -The next morning Colonel Clark went to the great Indian council, -accompanied by some of his officers and townsmen. At the last minute he -told Jim he might go. He also had the three Stinkers brought to the -council in chains. How ridiculous they looked clanking along beside the -officers. - -Jim was amazed at the number of Indians awaiting Colonel Clark’s -arrival. Jim looked over the crowd to see if he could see Chief -Minnemung or any of his Potawatomis. If they were there he could not -locate them in the vast throng. - -He glanced at his colonel, wondering if he were not frightened among so -many Indians. But Clark looked as if he were master of the entire -council. Fear was not a part of George Rogers Clark’s character; and -since the Indians had asked him to come to the council, he waited for -them to speak. - -After a few minutes a tall, erect, haughty chief, dressed in a handsome -buffalo robe, came forward to stand directly in front of Colonel Clark. -“Chief Long-Knife,” he began, “we hope the Great Spirit has brought us -together for good and that we may be received as friends. The bad bird -British ordered us to attack your countrymen.” - -He turned and motioned for one of his tribesmen to bring something to -him. When the Indian brought him a bloody belt, some red wampum and two -British flags, the chief threw them to the floor and stomped upon them. - -“We have received these emblems of war from the bad bird British and now -we hope peace with you will take the place of the bloody belt of war.” -Then the chief walked back to his people. Other chiefs came up asking -for peace. Even the Winnebagos came up and offered the peace pipe to -Colonel Clark. - -He waved them away, however, because he knew it was best to keep the -Winnebagos in suspense for a while about the fate of their Stinker -relatives still in chains. Then he told all chiefs who had made speeches -that he would consider their offer and give them an answer the next day. -He left the council with his staff, and all the townspeople and Jim. - -The next morning after the council fires were kindled anew, George -Rogers Clark gave his answer to the waiting Indians. He told them why -the Long-Knives were at war with the British, and that the British had -become so weak they were forced to hire Indians to fight for them. He -also told them the French king, father of all their French friends, had -also joined the Long-Knives against the British. - -Finally he said, “Now you can judge who is right, the Long-Knives or the -British. Here is the bloody belt of war, here the white belt of peace. -Take the one you please. Behave like men though, and choose the one you -wish. - - [Illustration: uncaptioned] - -“I do not want you to give me an answer until you have time to counsel. -We will part, and when you are ready, if the Great Spirit will bring us -together again, let us prove ourselves worthy by speaking and thinking -with one heart and one tongue.” Then Colonel Clark and his group left -the council, not returning until the Indians sent for him. - -They had assembled with their peace pipes, and many chiefs made flowery -speeches about their intended friendship with the Long-Knives. Later -they smoked their peace pipes and offered them to Clark, who went -through the pipe-smoking ceremony with them. - -Jim Hudson knew Indians did not always keep their word; how he hoped -Colonel Clark knew it, too. - -These council meetings went on for days until Jim grew weary of -attending them. One morning, however, he was surprised to see two -stalwart young Winnebagos present themselves in front of Colonel Clark, -then fall to the ground and cover themselves with a blanket. - -Jim did not know what to make of this and looked questioningly at the -colonel. George Rogers Clark’s face did not change expression as he -waited to see what would happen next. - -One of the Winnebago chiefs stepped forward; he explained that these two -young men were offering themselves as a sacrifice to atone for what -their Winnebago relatives had done at Clark’s headquarters. - -Colonel Clark did not reply at once, but kept staring at the blanket -covering the two men. Jim and the rest waited anxiously, expecting the -colonel to order the Winnebagos killed immediately, or at least to be -cast into irons. - -To everyone’s amazement, Colonel Clark rose and ordered the two Indians -to stand. Then he took each of them by the hand as brothers and -introduced them to his officers and the Frenchmen sitting with his -group. A loud murmur of approval arose from the surprised Indians. Still -more surprising to Jim was Clark’s order to free the Stinkers who had -tried to kidnap him. - -All during these meetings Jim had looked in vain for the Potawatomis -with whom he had spent the winter; he wondered if they had ever arrived -in Cahokia. The day after Clark had freed the Stinkers, Jim discovered -Chief Minnemung and his clan sitting near the front of the assembly. For -a moment he was afraid—would these Potawatomis try to capture him again? -Then he glanced at Colonel Clark and realized he was safe where he was. - -At this council meeting Big Gate, one of the great Potawatomi chiefs, -spoke for the entire tribe, saying they were ready to sign a peace -treaty with the Long-Knives. When the treaty was signed, Colonel Clark -and his staff rose to leave. Suddenly Chief Minnemung barred his path. - -“Big Long-Knife, chief of all the Long-Knives,” Minnemung began, nodding -toward Jim, “this boy ran away from our clan. I planned to adopt him as -my own son.” - -Jim began to tremble when Colonel Clark turned to him, all the while -pretending he had never known of Minnemung’s plan. “Jim,” he said -sternly, “is this true?” - -“Yes, sir,” Jim stammered, “but I didn’t want——” - -Chief Minnemung gestured impatiently, as he interrupted Jim. “Big -Long-Knife, I say Chief Minnemung no longer wants to adopt this boy. He -not make good Potawatomi. He is Jim Long-Knife. Chief Minnemung is no -longer interested in him. He now belongs to Big Long-Knife Clark.” - -Jim sighed in relief as Clark said gravely, “So be it, Chief Minnemung. -I accept this boy as Jim Long-Knife.” He extended his hand to the -Potawatomi chief to seal their bargain. - -Chief Minnemung shook hands with Clark without glancing at Jim. Then he -walked proudly to his clan. - -George Rogers Clark could be stern no longer. As he looked at Jim for a -moment, his hazel eyes twinkled in fun. “I guess this makes you safe, -Jim. You are now under my control and a real Long-Knife. Chief Minnemung -has decreed it. Jim Long-Knife. That’s a fine name for you.” - -Jim smiled. “Oh, sir, thank you. I’m so glad Chief Minnemung doesn’t -want me. I saw him sitting with the other Indians today, and I was -afraid he might have his men take me prisoner again sometime.” - - [Illustration: uncaptioned] - - - - - Chapter VIII - A PEACEFUL INTERVAL - - -While Clark was counseling and making treaties with the different Indian -tribes at Cahokia, he was also sending men on different missions -throughout the western country. - -For the most important mission he chose Father Gibault and Dr. Laffont, -an influential citizen of Kaskaskia. They were to take a proclamation to -the French settlers at Vincennes, asking them to renounce their fidelity -to the British king, George III and swear allegiance to the Americans. - -Since Father Gibault was well known and respected for his earlier good -works among the people there and Dr. Laffont was a most persuasive man, -the French settlers willingly took their oath of allegiance to the -Americans. - -Both men returned to Colonel Clark with this good news long before his -negotiations with the Indians were completed. Then Clark dispatched -Captain Helm to take charge of Fort Sackville at Vincennes. - -Now that the three French villages, Kaskaskia, Cahokia and Vincennes -were in American hands, about half of Clark’s volunteers returned to -their homes in Kentucky and Virginia. Those who stayed acted not only as -guards for the American headquarters, but reinforced the French -garrisons at Kaskaskia and Cahokia against possible Indian attack. - -Jim didn’t know how to occupy his time, now that Colonel Clark didn’t -seem to need him. One evening he decided to ask the colonel about it. “I -have nothing to do here, Colonel Clark,” he began. “I could go back to -Kentucky to see what’s left of our farm. I wouldn’t be afraid to stay -there alone, sir, and I could start clearing more land.” - -Colonel Clark fidgeted in his chair. “I know you aren’t afraid, Jim, but -I wouldn’t think of letting you go back alone. You’d be a perfect target -for Indians. They haven’t all signed treaties, remember. Even so, I -don’t trust these redskins too far. Now if your parents——” - -“But, sir,” Jim interrupted, “I don’t know if my parents——” - -“I know, lad. It’ll be time enough for you to go back to your farm when -we locate your father and mother. I have asked every man who has gone -out from here to be on the lookout for the Hudsons. They are to ask in -every settlement if any one has seen or heard of them. It’s a slow sort -of grapevine method, I know, but word gets around that way. We’ll find -them, Jim, some day.” - -Jim’s blue eyes misted with tears. “Oh, Colonel Clark, you think of -everything. No wonder you’re such a good military leader.” - -“You can stay on at headquarters with me, Jim. That will give you a roof -over your head and three meals a day.” He stared at Jim for a moment and -then grinned. “I’ll have to find a buckskin outfit for you too, lad. -Even if you are Jim Long-Knife, that ragged blue outfit you’re wearing -must be replaced.” - -Jim laughed. “These are the clothes the Potawatomis gave me. I have no -others. The Shawnees took the ones my mother was taking to Harrodsburg.” - -“And you’ll need some work to do, Jim, to keep you out of mischief.” - -“I can get a job, I’m sure. Willie told me he could get work for me with -Monsieur Gabriel Cerré, the wealthy merchant here. Willie works for -him.” - -Colonel Clark frowned. “Willie? Who’s Willie?” - -Jim seemed surprised. “Willie Watson, sir. The boy we found in the boat -the night we took Kaskaskia.” - -Clark nodded. “To be sure. I remember you told me about him, but I -didn’t notice him that night. What does he do for Monsieur Cerré?” - -“He sorts fur pelts and counts them. I saw him yesterday and he has -already started the fall work.” - -“It sounds like a good job, Jim. Ask Willie to take you to see Monsieur -Cerré.” - -“Yes, sir. I’ll go over now and see Willie.” - -Jim started over to the fur depot to find Willie, but on the way he saw -him coming. “Oh, Willie.” - -“Hello, Jim. Still running errands for Colonel Clark?” - -“No. I guess my work with him is over. I was just coming to see if you -could get me a job with Monsieur Cerré.” - -Willie smiled. “Sure. Just today the men were saying they needed another -boy to sort pelts this fall.” - -“Can we go tomorrow?” - -Willie shook his head. “There isn’t going to be any work tomorrow. The -men have to wait for some supplies coming up from New Orleans. I’ll be -glad to take you as soon as the depot opens again. I’ve just been -talking to Father Gibault about getting the beeswax and honey from that -bee tree I marked for him.” - -“Haven’t you been across the river since that night?” - -“No. You see Father Gibault thought it would be easier to get later in -the fall. But since there’s no work tomorrow he said I might go after -it, if I could get someone to help me. Would you like to go along with -me?” - -Jim’s eyes sparkled. “Sure, if Colonel Clark says I may.” - -“Come over about ten o’clock then. We can’t go too early as we have to -wait until most of the bees are out of the hive.” - -“I’ll be there, Willie.” - -“Be sure to wear your moccasins—” Willie looked doubtfully at Jim’s -thin, worn clothes, “and you’d better get some buckskin clothes to wear. -Bees can’t sting through buckskin.” - -“All right. See you tomorrow.” - -Colonel Clark said Jim might go after the honey, but added he couldn’t -go unless they found some buckskin clothes for him to wear. He hunted -through some of the supplies at headquarters and found a buckskin -outfit. - -When Jim arrived at Willie’s house, Willie was ready and waiting for -him. He handed Jim one large wooden bucket and carried another himself. -“We’ll put the honey and wax in these buckets,” Willie explained. Then -he picked up a gaily colored cloth bundle. - -The two boys put out in one of Father Gibault’s boats and soon crossed -the Kaskaskia River, landing near the house which Clark had surrounded -the night he made his march on Kaskaskia. - -Willie moored the boat to a tree along the bank. Then they started out -to find the tree Willie had marked with Father Gibault’s initials. They -wandered quite a way before Willie suddenly cried, “See, Jim, there it -is!” He pointed to a tree with a large fork high above the ground. - -Jim also saw the initials F. G. on the trunk; these Willie had carved -the day the Long-Knives had found him in the boat. “Why did you put -Father Gibault’s initials there, Willie?” - -“Why, to show the honey belonged to Father Gibault. No one will steal -honey from a marked tree,” Willie explained as he untied his cloth -bundle. Out tumbled two blue _capots_ or cloaks with hoods, two small -scarfs and two pairs of mittens. Then he took out a long, sharp knife -from the pocket of one of the _capots_. “Now we’ll get dressed to tackle -the bees.” - -Jim picked up the larger _capot_ and tried it on. “I can’t wear this, -Willie. It’s too small.” - -Willie had already put on his _capot_ and adjusted its hood over his -head. “You can’t? Say, you’re bigger than I thought. That’s my mother’s -_capot_, but I guess you need a man-sized one. Just put the hood over -your head and let the cloak fly,” he suggested as he tied a scarf over -his face. - -Jim looked at the _capot_ dubiously. “Why are we wearing all this stuff -anyway, Willie?” - -“To keep the bees from stinging us, of course.” - -“We’ll smother, Willie, and we can’t see with the scarfs over our -faces.” - -Willie nodded. “That’s right. I’m a stupid ox not to think of that. -Well, I’ll fix it.” He picked up the knife and cut two slits in each -scarf. “Now we have peepholes. Put one on, and the mittens too, Jim. If -the bees are in a bad mood, they can’t sting us through the buckskin and -these winter clothes.” - -Jim put them on and then asked, “Now what do we do?” - -“I’ll climb up and start cutting the honey and wax away. It’s up there -in a deep hole in the fork of the tree. You put your bucket at the base -of the tree and I’ll try to drop the honey and wax into it. This is a -beautiful day, so maybe most of the bees will be gone from their hive.” - -Jim watched as Willie climbed the tree. What a ridiculous sight he was, -with the blue _capot_ flapping against his skinny legs. - -Willie thrust the long knife into the hole and began turning it slowly -around and around. Only a few bees emerged and buzzed around his blue -hood. - -“Fix the bucket, Jim,” Willie called as the honey began oozing down the -tree. - -Jim put his bucket under the tree and began slapping at a few bees that -were buzzing all around him. - -“Don’t fight them, Jim. It makes them angry. Just let them buzz and I -don’t think they’ll sting you.” - -Soon Willie had rolled out so much honey and beeswax that his bucket -would not hold it all. When both buckets were filled, Willie came down -from the tree. “Now you carry one and I’ll carry the other.” - -Quite a bit of honey had trickled down the tree, so the bees stayed -behind, instead of following Willie and Jim. - -As the boys walked back through the woods, Willie looked admiringly at -Jim. “I didn’t realize you’re so much larger than I am,” Willie said. -“Why, you’re as tall as lots of men. How old are you?” - -Jim smiled. “I guess I grew a lot while I was with the Potawatomis. I’m -thir—why, Willie, I’m fourteen now. I forgot all about my birthday this -year. But no wonder, I was fourteen the day after we captured Kaskaskia -the fifth of July.” - -Willie stood as tall as he could. “Why, I’m almost as old as you, Jim. -I’ll be fourteen the second of January.” - -Jim was almost a head taller than Willie. He looked down at the younger -boy and smiled. “You will? I thought you were about twelve.” - -“I may be short, but I can do lots of things that men can’t do,” Willie -replied. - -“Oh, I’m sure of that,” Jim agreed. - -Father Gibault was delighted with the amount of honey and wax that the -boys brought back, and gave half the honey to Jim for Colonel Clark and -his men. When Willie told him Jim would like to work alongside of him, -Father Gibault said he would put in a good word for him to Monsieur -Cerré. - -A few days later Jim went with Willie to the fur depot to see Monsieur -Cerré. The merchant put him to work with Willie, sorting and counting -the pelts which Indians and French _voyageurs_ had brought into -Kaskaskia during the fall and winter. - -Jim and Willie became the best of friends, spending many long evenings -together either at Willie’s house or at Colonel Clark’s headquarters. -Jim taught him to play his drum; Willie was such an apt pupil and so -filled with rhythm that he soon played as well as Jim. In return Willie -taught Jim all the gay lilting French songs he knew. - -Jim enjoyed living in Kaskaskia; if his parents had been with him, he -would have willingly spent the rest of his life among the French. They -were a gay light-hearted people, always ready to stop work and have fun. - -The men played cards endlessly on the outdoor galleries until winter -winds drove them indoors. There were many church festivals to attend, -dances for the boys to watch and always excellent food. At Christmas -time there were many gay parties given for the French citizens and -Clark’s soldiers. - -On New Year’s Day of 1779 came the best day of all. The whole village -turned out in its finest clothes to call at the homes of well-to-do -folk. - -And what a colorful procession they made; the men wore silken hose and -bright silver shoe buckles, their richly trimmed coats open to show -their fancy, embroidered waistcoats; the women dressed in feathered -finery imported from France by way of New Orleans and the Mississippi -River. Ordinary French settlers wore buckskin trousers and long colored -cotton shirts belted in by colored bead sashes tied behind, and topped -by the familiar blue _capots_. Now and then there appeared in the crowd -a soldier in an ancient French uniform, or a _voyageur_ in his leather -ruffled shirt and brightly colored cap with bobbing tassel. - -Jim found life good in Kaskaskia until one afternoon in late January. On -the twenty-ninth day of the month Jim came home from work and met a -well-dressed gentleman just leaving Colonel Clark’s headquarters. Jim -wondered who this man was. - -As Jim walked into the house, George Rogers Clark was pacing the floor -and running his hand nervously through his shock of red hair. He didn’t -even see Jim come in, but continued to pace back and forth. Jim took off -his coat and hung it in the closet. Then he came back into the large -living room. - -“Is something wrong, Colonel?” - -Clark stopped and turned toward Jim. “Hello, Jim. I didn’t hear you come -in. Yes, I’ve just received some bad news.” - -“From the gentleman who was leaving as I came into the house?” - -“Oh, did you see him? That was Francis Vigo, a Spanish merchant from St. -Louis. I had asked him to see about Captain Helm’s supplies, since he -was going on a merchandising trip to Vincennes.” - -“Yes, sir.” Jim waited, seeing Colonel Clark was quite upset. - -“I’ve had no word from Captain Helm for a long time,” Clark continued. -“And that’s not like Helm, so I was a bit uneasy. Vigo told me that he -himself was captured and taken to Fort Sackville. There he was -confronted by Lieutenant Governor Hamilton. You see, Jim, Hamilton -captured Fort Sackville on the seventeenth of December and Captain Helm -is now his prisoner. The British are again in control of Fort Sackville -and Vincennes.” - -Jim gasped. “Do you mean Hamilton from Detroit?” - -“The very same. He took all of Vigo’s merchandise from him and wouldn’t -release him until Vigo promised not to return to Kaskaskia on his way -home to St. Louis.” Clark smiled wryly. “Vigo kept his promise too. He -went home to St. Louis, then came over here immediately to tell me about -Helm.” - -Jim looked puzzled. “What does it mean for us now that Hamilton is in -Vincennes?” - -“Vigo told me Hamilton plans to attack Kaskaskia as soon as the weather -permits, some time in the spring. He’s supposed to have an army of eight -hundred men, counting the Indians and his prisoners.” - -“Eight hundred!” Jim gasped. There weren’t eight hundred people in the -two towns of Kaskaskia and Cahokia. - -Colonel Clark resumed his pacing back and forth as though he had -forgotten Jim. After a time he stopped suddenly. “Attack at once, Jim. -That’s what we’ll do.” He brought his fist down hard in the palm of his -hand. “It’s our only chance. We’ll attack Hamilton now when he thinks -it’s impossible. But we’ll make it.” - -Jim’s blue eyes sparkled reflecting Clark’s confidence. “Yes, sir. What -can I do to help you now?” - -“Run to Father Gibault’s and ask him if he will come to my headquarters -at once. Then see if you can find Captain Charleville and tell him to -report to me immediately. But do not tell them or anyone else what I -have just told you. Do not even mention Vigo’s visit.” - -“No, sir, I won’t.” - -Colonel Clark then called one of his officers who had been asleep -upstairs. “You,” he nodded toward the man as soon as he appeared, “ride -to Cahokia tonight. Tell Captain McCarty to bring his company back from -Cahokia immediately.” - -“Yes, sir,” replied the officer. - -Jim dashed out of the house toward Father Gibault’s, while Clark’s -officer mounted his horse and set off at a gallop for Cahokia. - -Father Gibault and Captain Charleville returned to headquarters with Jim -almost immediately. George Rogers Clark told them the bad news of -Vincennes and what he had in mind to do. - -Father Gibault looked grave for a few minutes and then said, “Colonel -Clark, I’m not a military man, but I think your plan of attack is good. -God willing, you will make it.” - -Captain Charleville sat forward in his chair. “Colonel Clark, there -aren’t many of your Virginia volunteers here now, but I’m sure I can -raise a company among the villagers.” - -Colonel Clark nodded. “We’ll have to have volunteers, Charleville. I -don’t have more than eighty men, including the men under Captain McCarty -at Cahokia. I’ve sent for him to return with them. We can’t do anything -more until morning, gentlemen. Thank you for responding so quickly.” - -“I’ll have a full company raised before sunset tomorrow, sir,” Captain -Charleville promised. - - [Illustration: uncaptioned] - - - - - Chapter IX - THROUGH THE DROWNED LANDS - - -The next morning Father Gibault rang the church bell, signaling all -people to assemble at the church. Immediately the villagers came -streaming out of their houses or stores. Colonel Clark and Jim waited -outside for them to appear. Jim had brought his drum, and played it -loudly to attract their attention. - -Willie Watson came running to the church; when he saw Jim, he pushed -through the crowd to him. - -“What’s all the excitement, Jim? What’s happened?” Willie asked -breathlessly. - -Jim didn’t lose a drumbeat as he replied, “Wait and find out, Willie. -Colonel Clark is going to talk to the people.” - -As soon as everyone was quiet, Father Gibault told them that Colonel -Clark had an important message for them. Then Colonel Clark told them -that even now Hamilton was in command of Vincennes and was planning to -attack Kaskaskia as soon as the weather permitted. - -Before the citizens could recover from this shock, Clark had outlined -his plan of an immediate march on Vincennes and a surprise attack on -Fort Sackville. He said he would need volunteers to help build a supply -boat he would send ahead for his army. - -“I’ll help. I’ll help,” came the cry of the men from every quarter. - -“And we’ll help, too,” the women cried. “We’ll make flags for your army. -You’ll need banners to carry.” - -Colonel Clark smiled and nodded. “Those of you who will help with the -boat and supplies, step over on this side. And you who will volunteer to -go to Vincennes, sign up with Captain Charleville.” - -The men quickly made their choices, and Jim began to play his drum again -to interest the men in joining Captain Charleville’s company. - -“Jim,” asked Willie, who had stood quietly up to now, “are you going to -Vincennes?” - -“Of course, Willie. I haven’t asked Colonel Clark, but he’ll be needing -a drummer, I know.” - -“If you’re going, I am, too,” Willie said, excitement making his voice -shrill. “I think my mother has a rifle which belonged to my father. I -can take it with me.” - -Jim looked doubtfully at Willie. “Can you fire a rifle?” - -Willie shook his head. “No, but I can learn.” - -Jim grinned. “It takes a lot of practice, Willie, but I’ve an idea. If -you’ll let me have your father’s rifle, I’ll let you take my drum. You -can play it well, and I’ve had experience with rifles. My father taught -me to use one.” - -Willie smiled. “Will you, Jim? Sure—you can have the rifle.” - -“I don’t think we’d better say anything to Colonel Clark until it’s time -to go,” Jim cautioned. “He might think of an excuse to keep us from -going with him.” - -“All right, Jim. Mum’s the word, but I’ll manage to get the rifle.” - -By nightfall Captain Charleville had raised his company of Kaskaskia -volunteers. The women were so enthusiastic about the undertaking that -they worked furiously for the next two days, making flags of various -colors and designs. When they were presented to Colonel Clark, he didn’t -know what he would do with so many flags. But he thanked the ladies -gravely and packed their gift with the army supplies. - -On the third of February Captain McCarty arrived from Cahokia with his -volunteers. That same day the men finished work on the riverboat, which -Clark had named the _Willing_. They had made it into a warship equipped -with armament of two four-pounders and four swivels. It required a crew -of forty men to man, and Clark put Captain John Rogers in charge of it. - -He ordered Rogers to go down the Kaskaskia and Mississippi Rivers to the -Ohio and ascend the Ohio and Wabash Rivers; then he was to take his -station thirty miles below Vincennes and wait there for further orders. -The next day Captain Rogers and his crew set out on the warship with -supplies, stores and ammunition. - -At three o’clock in the afternoon of February fifth, Clark’s army was -ready to march. Jim had had to talk long and hard to get Clark’s -permission to go with the troops; he had made no mention of Willie. But -Willie stood beside Jim, carrying his father’s rifle, which protruded -above his head. - -As the army, one hundred-thirty men strong, stood waiting, Father -Gibault made a little talk to the men and gave them his blessing and -absolution. All the women and men not able to go with Clark were on hand -to bid the troops good-bye and wish them Godspeed. - -George Rogers Clark rode in front on a magnificent stallion, followed by -his officers, also mounted. Jim Long-Knife Hudson, wearing an -ill-fitting buckskin suit and beating his drum, stepped out proudly. -Willie Watson dropped back to the rear of the second company, fearing -Colonel Clark would see him and send him home because of his age and -size. - -The rest of the men, clad in worn buckskin trousers and hunting shirts, -swung out jauntily, their heads held high. Some carried rifles and some -tomahawks, since there weren’t enough rifles for everyone. A motley -array—Clark’s pioneer army, and at the same time a magnificent column of -spirited soldiers. - -The whole of the flat Illinois country between Kaskaskia and Vincennes -was freezing water and half-frozen mud. Two hundred and forty miles lay -between the army and Vincennes, but the men bravely started out. By -nightfall, however, they had covered only three miles. It was rainy and -drizzly, so they spent an uncomfortable night without tents or shelter -of any kind. The next day they remained in camp. - -That night Colonel Clark spied Willie Watson for the first time. -“Willie!” he cried, “what are you doing here?” - -Willie trembled but stood his ground. “I’m marching with you to take -Fort Sackville, sir,” he replied. - -Clark shook his head. “You’re too young, Willie, for this trip. If I had -seen you earlier, you would have remained at home.” - -Willie grinned mischievously. “Yes, sir. I’ve taken pains to stay out of -your sight, sir. I was afraid you wouldn’t let me come along. And I’m -fourteen years old, as old as Jim Hudson. I brought my father’s rifle -too.” - -Clark smiled and then shook his head. “I admire your spirit, Willie. Can -you fire your rifle?” - -Willie shook his head slowly. “No, sir, I can’t. But Jim is going to -take my rifle and I’ll play his drum.” - -Colonel Clark looked grave. “Since it’s too late to send you home, -Willie, I guess you’ll just have to stay.” - -Willie smiled. “Oh, sir, thank you. I’ll make it. You won’t regret my -coming, sir.” - -The next day the soldiers marched for nine hours, then pitched camp in a -square on the driest ground they could find, putting their baggage in -the center. - -As they continued through succeeding days they marched sometimes through -water up to their armpits. They had to hold rifles and powder high above -their heads to keep them dry. - -In desperation Clark and his officers dismounted and piled the baggage -on their horses. The animals struggled along through the water with the -men. - -If any men happened to see any wild game, Colonel Clark gave them time -to shoot it. Now and then they bagged a deer and on the twelfth of -February they sighted a herd of buffalo. - -“Here, Willie,” Jim called, “take my drum and give me your rifle. Maybe -I can get a buffalo.” - -Willie handed over the rifle, as Jim noticed with satisfaction it was -exactly like his father’s. He dashed out with two soldiers to shoot one -of the buffalos. He went as close as he dared to the herd, took careful -aim and fired. His buffalo dropped immediately as did several others -which the men shot. In a few minutes they had dragged the buffaloes over -toward the fires. - - [Illustration: uncaptioned] - -“Good boy, Jim,” Willie said, clapping him on the back excitedly. “We’ll -eat plenty tonight.” - -Clark’s army did eat a good meal and had entertainment afterward. Willie -and Jim sang many of the songs they had learned together, and took turns -playing the drum. Willie also danced a strange mixture of French and -Indian dances until he was exhausted. - -That evening the two boys helped boost the morale of Clark’s army more -than anyone else save the colonel himself. Colonel Clark was quick to -give them credit. “We could never have made it this far, boys,” he said, -“without your music and dancing.” - -The boys were exhausted from their performance; Jim was too tired to say -a word. But Willie grinned at Colonel Clark and said, “I told you, sir, -you wouldn’t regret letting me come with you.” - -During their first six days this remarkable army marched over one -hundred and seventy-four miles, averaging twenty-eight miles a day. The -hardest part of the trip, however, lay before them——the sixty-three -miles to Vincennes. They would have four rivers to cross—two branches of -the Little Wabash, the Embarrass and the Great Wabash, all of them now -swollen by floods. - -When the army reached the two Little Wabash branches, normally three -miles apart, the men were stunned to see a sheet of water almost five -miles across, with no dry banks or channels for either branch in sight. -The shallowest place was about three feet deep; what the greatest depth -was, no man knew. - -Colonel Clark ordered his soldiers to halt while he considered what to -do. For a few minutes he gazed at the great expanse of water, then -ordered some of the men to build a pirogue. This took only a day to -build. Then he ordered a few others to explore these drowned lands and -if possible, find a dry camping spot on the far bank of the second -branch. Once they found a trail, they marked it with blazes on all trees -above the waterline. - -But how to get the loaded pack horses across both branches of the river? -The horses could wade to the first channel easily enough, but when in -deep water they would have to swim, and they could not swim with their -heavy packs. Once again Colonel Clark solved his new problem. He had his -men build a scaffold in a shallow spot beyond the second river bank. - -When this was finished, the men unloaded the horses and moved the -baggage over to the scaffold in their pirogue. Then they swam the horses -through both channels, reloading the animals at the scaffold. They also -ferried any ill, weak soldiers across both river branches. - -As Colonel Clark himself plunged into the water, he expected the rest of -his army to follow him along the tree-blazed route. But the men hung -back, complaining they were already cold and wet enough without wading -another five miles. - -Suddenly Willie Watson, seeing Colonel Clark floundering through the -water alone, seized Jim’s drum and started into the water, beating the -drum as hard as he could. “Come on, you,” he called, beating a terrific -roll. Jim plunged in right behind Willie, holding his rifle high above -his head. - -Soon the water was up to Willie’s armpits. He pushed the drum down and -sat on it, floating along and paddling the water with his drumsticks. -“Come on, you fellows,” he called. “Somebody give me a push.” - -A French sergeant, almost six and a half feet tall, charged into the -water, scooped up Willie and his drum, put him on his shoulders and -shouted, “Advance!” - -Willie’s courageous antics turned the trick for Colonel Clark. While -Willie played and sang at the top of his lungs, the rest of the soldiers -waded into the water and did not turn back, though in some places the -water came up to their chins. But no dry spot could be found, so they -had to spend the night in shallow water without food. - -Somehow they continued to march through the ice-cold drowned lands until -they had crossed the Embarrass and Wabash Rivers. Here the men in their -soaking wet clothes were more discouraged than ever. This was the place -where the _Willing_ was supposed to be waiting for them. The warship, -however, had not arrived. - -The next day the camp awakened to a dull boom. - -“What’s that?” Willie cried, poking Jim who lay beside him. - -“I don’t know,” Jim mumbled. “Sounded like guns, didn’t it?” - -One soldier overheard the boys and said, “Colonel Clark said those were -the British morning guns at Fort Sackville.” - -“Why, we’re almost there,” Jim cried, jumping up and stretching. - -“Almost there!” sneered another soldier. “Take a look at that water.” - -“Where are we?” Willie asked, rubbing the sleep out of his eyes. - -“About nine miles below Vincennes on the banks of the Great Wabash!” a -nearby soldier exclaimed. “But how we’ll ever get across that flood -water I don’t know.” Several more men began to complain, and some even -muttered about going home. - -Jim and Willie looked around and saw Captain McCarty’s men cutting down -poplar trees. - -“Come on, Willie,” Jim said. “Let’s see what they’re going to do with -those trees.” - -The boys went over to help drag the poplars to a dry area where the men -could build canoes. They worked all day and by evening had finished two. -Meanwhile the boys saw two more drifting aimlessly on the flood waters, -so they waded out and captured them. Now Colonel Clark had four canoes -to ferry his army over some of this vast expanse of river. - -The next morning it was raining again and the water was still quite -cold. Though the soldiers still had had nothing to eat, the stronger -ones began ferrying the troops over to a small hill called Bubbie. From -here they waded to a larger hill, clutching trees and bushes in the -water to steady themselves. The canoes went alongside to watch for any -sick men. - -Those who were able built fires on the opposite side of the river and -marched the exhausted men up and down in front of the fire to revive -them. - -At last they reached Warrior’s Island, a dry spot of about ten acres. -From here Clark planned to attack Fort Sackville. The men had to rest, -however, before he could order the attack. - -A day or two later, some of Clark’s scouts brought two Indian squaws and -two half-grown boys into camp and presented them to him. - -“What do I want with these people?” Clark demanded. “I haven’t anything -to feed to my own men, to say nothing of four prisoners.” - -“That’s it, sir,” one scout replied. “They had food in their canoe. It -was filled with kettles, tallow, corn and half a quarter of buffalo -meat. We have it here, but what shall we do with these Indians?” - -“Food!” cried several of the men near the colonel. “Where?” - -“Make some buffalo stew for the men immediately,” Clark ordered. He -looked at the trembling Indians. “I guess we’ll have to take these -prisoners to Vincennes with us.” - -Just at this moment Jim and Willie came up to the colonel. When Jim saw -the Indians, he stopped and stared as if he didn’t believe his own eyes. -Then he dashed over to the taller Indian boy. “Wahbunou!” he cried. -“What are you doing here?” - -Wahbunou tried to smile, but was too frightened to talk. He just grabbed -Jim and clung to him. - -George Rogers Clark looked at Jim in amazement. “Jim, do you know this -boy?” - -“Oh, sir,” Jim cried, “this is Wahbunou, my Potawatomi friend that I -told you about.” - -Colonel Clark looked keenly at the boy and then at Jim. “Is this the boy -who did not tell his people about seeing the Long-Knives marching that -summer afternoon?” - -“Yes, sir.” - -Clark smiled at the Indian boy. “Well then, Wahbunou, I am sorry we had -to take your food. But my men have had nothing to eat for several days. -You are no longer a prisoner of Chief Long-Knife. All four of you are -free to take your canoe and return home.” - -Wahbunou did not understand all that Colonel Clark said to him, but when -Jim interpreted, the Indian boy nodded his head and smiled. - -George Rogers Clark shook hands with Wahbunou and said, “If you will -come to Fort Sackville in a few days I’ll pay you for your food. -Unfortunately, I have nothing to give you for it tonight.” - -Wahbunou nodded again, spoke to his Indian companions and motioned for -them to follow him. They found their canoe and paddled rapidly away. - -Meanwhile the men were busy making buffalo stew. When it was ready the -weakest men were fed first. Though there wasn’t enough stew to go -around, it revived many exhausted soldiers and improved the spirit of -all the soldiers. - - [Illustration: _Vincennes_] - - - - - Chapter X - CAPTURE OF VINCENNES - - -From their camp the men could see the hundred cabins making up the town -of Vincennes, and Fort Sackville over which the Union Jack was flying. -If settlers in Vincennes turned toward Warrior’s Island, they could see -American soldiers; so George Rogers Clark employed a trick of war to -make them think he commanded a large army. - -While the men were resting after their taste of buffalo stew, two more -of Clark’s scouts came into camp bringing a very frightened Frenchman -from Vincennes. They said they had found him lurking near the camp. -Willie and Jim had been sitting near the colonel and could hear -everything he said to the Frenchman. - -Clark spoke sternly to the man cowering in front of him. “I will permit -you to go into town under certain conditions. First you are to alert all -French inhabitants and tell them we will take Vincennes tonight. They -are to stay in their houses, keep quiet and not to let any one at Fort -Sackville know of our presence. Oh, yes, and tell them to have a fine -supper ready for us.” - -“Yes, sir,” the man replied. “And to think you’ve marched all the way -from Kentucky!” - -Clark did not correct the man’s guess about Kentucky. He merely said, -“Now you may go, but do not go near the fort.” As the Frenchman hurried -to Vincennes to deliver his message, Colonel Clark watched through his -field glass to see that he did not go to the fort. - -About sunset Clark ordered his army to assemble. When they were in their -respective companies, with Jim and Willie in front, Colonel Clark said, -“I ask just one thing of all of you—OBEDIENCE. Absolute OBEDIENCE.” - -“Yes, sir,” every man replied. - -Clark turned to Jim and Willie. “You boys bring out the flags which we -brought from Kaskaskia. We have good use for them now.” - -The boys went over to the small stock of supplies they had succeeded in -bringing through the water, and took out the flags. These had been so -well packed they were not even damp. There were twenty-four in all. - -“Each officer is to have a pair of flags mounted on poles,” Clark said. - -The officers mounted several flags as Clark had directed. Willie and Jim -wondered what they would do with the rest. - -“See that small hill between us and the town?” Clark pointed to a hill -about halfway to Vincennes. “You are to march your men around and around -that hill, every sixth man carrying a flag so far as possible. Thus you -will give the effect of many divisions, each carrying its flag, to -anyone watching from Vincennes. When I give the order, you march around -that hill until dark. Then I will issue your orders for the night.” - -Colonel Clark led the line of march, followed by Willie Watson with the -drum, Jim Hudson, Captain McCarty and the first of the color bearers. -They marched around and around the hill in plain view of the -townspeople. Should anyone be watching, he might easily assume that -George Rogers Clark had at least a thousand men at his command. - -Finally night fell. Tension was mounting among the men. Now, now was the -time for attack. How many men did Hamilton have? Had this army come all -through the drowned lands to suffer defeat? Never, while they drew -breath. - -Such thoughts were in the mind of every man when Colonel Clark suddenly -snapped them to attention. - -“Lieutenant Baily,” he ordered, “take fourteen of your best men and -begin firing on the fort as soon as we have reached Vincennes. Then -cease firing for a few minutes and laugh loudly as though you were -firing for amusement.” - -The lieutenant stepped forward and called out fourteen men. - -Colonel Clark went on. “I will lead the rest of this army to the heights -behind Vincennes and enter the upper part of town. The sentinels on the -stockade walls won’t be able to see us, because part of the town lies -between our line of march and their garrison.” - -Then he set out with the main army toward Vincennes, while Lieutenant -Baily marched his fourteen men toward the stockade. - -Jim and Willie, marching with the main army, became so excited they -could scarcely set one foot after the other. In no time at all Clark’s -army took possession of the main street and posted guards. Scarcely -anyone was in sight because of Clark’s order for the people to remain in -their houses. Jim was assigned to guard duty; Willie went with Colonel -Clark on his rounds through the town. - -In a little while Willie came hurrying back to Jim. “Jim,” he cried. -“The people have supper ready for us. We’re going to take turns eating. -Colonel Clark said he’d send a man to relieve you shortly, and you’re to -come with me.” - -Just at this moment there was a burst of rifle fire, then the sound of -raucous laughter. - -“Our men have begun the attack, Willie,” Jim cried, peering into the -black night. “We’ll soon take Vincennes and the fort.” - -There was, however, no answering fire from the fort. In a few minutes -another volley of shots rent the air. - -“Let’s go nearer to the fort, Jim, and see what’s going on.” - -Jim shook his head. “I can’t, Willie. I’m on guard here, remember.” - -After another burst of fire by the Americans, there was a sudden, -answering roar from the guns inside the fort. - -Just at this moment Colonel Clark appeared with a man to relieve Jim. -“You boys eat your supper. Report back here when you’ve finished, Jim,” -Clark said, and went on to direct the firing which was now continuous. - - [Illustration: uncaptioned] - -“Come on, Jim. I know where we’re supposed to go.” Willie led the way to -one of the villagers’ homes, where seven or eight soldiers were just -finishing their meal. - -“Come in, boys,” called a rosy-cheeked woman. “There is plenty of food -for all of you.” - -The boys sat down to a bountiful dinner of roast duck, the best meal -they had eaten since their buffalo feast many days ago. While they were -eating, the woman kept staring at Jim. Finally she said, “Soldier, have -I seen you before? There’s something very familiar about your face.” - -Jim looked blankly at her. “I don’t know, ma’am. I don’t recall ever -having seen you.” - -Still she looked at him. “It’s sure queer. You remind me of someone. I -can’t quite figure—say, what’s your name? Mine’s Jeanne Duval.” - -Jim smiled. “Sometimes I’m called Jim Long-Knife. The Indians gave me -that name. But my real name’s Jim Hudson.” - -“Hudson!” Jeanne exclaimed, her voice shrill with excitement. “And -where’s your home?” - -Jim shook his head. “I haven’t any home now except with Colonel Clark. I -used to live in Kentucky.” - -“Kentucky, you say. I wonder if you—” - -The roar of cannon from Fort Sackville cut off her words. Jim and Willie -jumped up. “Thank you, ma’am, for the good dinner. We can fight better -now,” Jim said, as they started out the door. - -“When the fighting’s over, come back here, Jim. Come back for sure.” - -“All right,” Jim replied, “if I’m alive.” - -The boys made their way back to Jim’s post and found it in the thick of -the fighting. American soldiers were pouring the hottest fire possible -into the fort. - -“Look, Willie,” Jim said as he got his rifle ready, “look at those gaps -in the stockade.” - -Just then the British poked an artillery piece out of a porthole, while -the Americans sent a shower of well-directed balls into it. - -“Hurrah!” cried Willie, “got some British that time.” - -The intense firing from both sides went on until about four o’clock in -the morning. Then Colonel Clark withdrew all his troops save a few -observation parties, and the firing ceased. - -About nine o’clock George Rogers Clark sent a flag of truce into the -fort with a message to Hamilton asking him to surrender immediately. -This Hamilton refused to do and the firing began anew. But three hours -later Hamilton sent out a flag asking for a three-days’ truce. Clark -refused, but offered to have a conference with Hamilton in the church at -once. - -While Clark waited for his answer, everyone outside the fort, French and -Americans alike, watched the fort gate to see what would happen. Willie -and Jim were in the front row, waiting as impatiently as the rest. - -“Jim!” Willie cried. “Look! The gate is opening.” - -And indeed it was. Out came a dignified man in the striking red uniform -of a British colonel of regulars, a handsome Indian and a grinning -American. - -“That man in red must be Hamilton himself,” Willie whispered. - -“And there’s Captain Helm!” exclaimed Jim. “You know he’s been -Hamilton’s prisoner since last December.” - -The three men walked on to the church. There they were met by George -Rogers Clark and Captain Bowman. All of them went into the church to -hold their conference. - -The villagers all began talking at once, wondering what would happen -next. The American soldiers relaxed a little, but still held their -rifles. - -As Willie and Jim started to walk up the street, a woman ran out from -the crowd calling to them. “Boys! Jim Hudson.” - -Jim turned and recognized Jeanne Duval. She was calling and beckoning to -him. “Come with me, Jim. To my house.” She nodded toward Willie. “You -may come too, lad.” - -“I can only stay a minute, ma’am,” Jim replied, glancing back at the -church. “Colonel Clark might want me.” - -“All right. Just come on.” She hurried on ahead and rushed into her -house. When the boys appeared she said, “Sit down a minute. I’ll be -right back.” Then she disappeared out the back door. - -Willie shook his head. “What kind of business is this, Jim? Do you -suppose it’s a trap?” - -Jim laughed. “I don’t think so, Willie. After all we aren’t such -important people in Clark’s army. She’s probably going to feed us -again.” - -In a few moments she returned with a thin, tired-looking blond woman. -Jim stared at her for an instant, then rushed over and swept her into -his arms. “Ma! Ma!” he cried. “At last! I’d almost given up hope of -finding you.” - -Ma Hudson was laughing and crying at the same time. “Jim, how you’ve -grown! Why, you’re a man! Jim dear, we knew you were alive and well in -Kaskaskia. Captain Helm told Pa.” - -“Captain Helm? But he’s a prisoner of Hamilton. And where is Pa?” - -Ma looked worried. “I hope he’s still alive in the fort. Pa and I are -also Hamilton’s prisoners. Pa’s probably had to man the guns against the -Americans.” - -“Against his own countrymen!” Jim gasped. “How do you happen to be -outside the fort?” - -Ma shrugged her thin shoulders. “Since there wasn’t any place for women -in the fort, the British put me in one of the French homes here. And the -people have been good to me.” She smiled at Jeanne Duval. - -“She’s been staying right next door,” Jeanne explained. “That’s why I -was so excited last night when I saw you. You look so much like your ma, -and when you told me your name, I was sure you were her boy.” - -“How did you get away from the Shawnees and reach Vincennes, Ma?” - -Ma Hudson sighed. “We didn’t get away from them, Jim. I think they -intended to take us up north to Hamilton, but the snows came and they -weren’t able to get through to Detroit. It was a rugged winter, with not -much to eat.” - -Jim frowned. “How did you and Pa get down here?” - -“Last autumn the Shawnees heard Hamilton was marching south, so they -rode to meet him and traded us for some guns and blankets. Hamilton -brought us down here with other prisoners. I’ve been mending for -Hamilton’s soldiers and sewing some for the people here. Your pa has -been helping repair the fort.” - -Jim had forgotten all about Willie while talking with his mother. -Suddenly he remembered him and said, “Ma, this is my best friend, Willie -Watson. He’s from Kaskaskia.” - -Ma smiled at Willie. “I’m glad to know you, Willie. You must have -wonderful people in Kaskaskia, because Jim looks so well.” - -“The same to you, ma’am,” stammered Willie, bobbing his head. - -“We’d better be getting back now, Ma,” Jim said. “I’ll see you when -Hamilton surrenders. Don’t worry about Pa. I’m sure he’s all right and -will be free as soon as Colonel Clark takes over here.” Jim turned to -Jeanne Duval. “Thank you, ma’am, for all you’ve done for Ma and me.” - -When the boys returned to the American lines, the conference was over. -No one was certain, however, that Hamilton would agree to the surrender -terms. Colonel Clark took no chances of deception by the British; he -posted guards in houses near the fort and patrols in town. The rest of -his army slept on their rifles and got their first real rest in many -days. - -The next day, February 25, 1779, Hamilton sent Captain Helm to Colonel -Clark with the signed articles of surrender. George Rogers Clark then -drew up his army in two lines facing each other in front of Fort -Sackville to await Hamilton. All of Vincennes gathered behind the -American army to see the surrender. - -Promptly at ten o’clock the wooden fort gate opened, and -Lieutenant-Governor Hamilton led his well-drilled, scarlet-clad regulars -of the King’s regiment between the lines of the ragged American -soldiers. Captain Helm, amidst loud hurrahs from the crowd, hoisted the -American flag above Fort Sackville. Fort Sackville and Vincennes were -now in American hands, never to be surrendered again. - -Hamilton’s prisoners of war were also turned over to Colonel Clark, -among them Pa Hudson. When Jim spied him in the group, he forgot all -about his duty as a soldier and rushed over to throw his arms around his -father. - -“Pa,” he cried, “I knew I’d find you sometime.” - -His father hugged him hard. “Ma and I knew from Captain Helm that you -were safe in Kaskaskia, but we didn’t know when we could get to you.” - -When the celebrations and ceremonies of surrender were over, George -Rogers Clark dispatched a detail to Virginia with Hamilton, his prisoner -of war, and sent home the French who had accompanied the British leader -from Detroit. - -Then Clark looked over the stores and supplies in the fort. In them he -found much clothing which had been sent from Detroit for the British -troops. From this supply every man in Clark’s army received new shirts, -caps, vests and trousers. These were most welcome gifts because the men -wanted to be presentable when they returned in triumph to Kaskaskia. - - [Illustration: uncaptioned] - -The Indians near Vincennes must have heard about Clark’s gifts, because -early one morning several of them came to the fort to receive presents -from Chief Long-Knife. Jim was helping to distribute these when he -recognized Wahbunou in the group. - -“Here’s Wahbunou, Colonel Clark,” he said as the Indian boy approached -them. - -Colonel Clark smiled and extended his hand to Wahbunou. “You’ve come to -be paid for that buffalo meat and corn, I suppose. Well, boy, I’m glad -to pay you. They saved our lives and made it possible for us to take -Vincennes.” The colonel himself looked through the supplies and brought -out two magnificent blankets. “Can you use these blankets, Wahbunou?” - -Wahbunou’s eyes shone as he took the blankets. “These are very good, -Chief Long-Knife. I have been paid plenty. I am glad my people could -help Jim’s people. Jim is my friend.” - -Jim took Wahbunou to one side. “My parents are here, Wahbunou,” he said. -“They were Hamilton’s prisoners, but now they are free. Won’t you stop -and see them?” - -Wahbunou beamed. “I’m glad you are with them. I can’t stop now, but -Wahbunou will see your mother when he comes to Vincennes again soon. -Your mother was very kind to me.” Then he turned and went back to the -other Indians. - -Before Colonel Clark led his men back to Kaskaskia, he took Willie -Watson to make a call on the Hudsons. Pa Hudson wanted to return to his -farm in Kentucky and asked Colonel Clark if he would advise going. - -Clark was silent for a few minutes, then shook his head. “Not yet, -Hudson. Why don’t you stay here until summer? If everything is favorable -then, you and your family can return to Kentucky. I’ll be back in June -as we intend to march on Detroit.” Then he turned to shake hands with -Jim. - -“You’ve been a good soldier, Jim Long-Knife. They don’t come any better -than you. I’ll say good-bye now and expect to see you when I return.” - -Jim’s eyes misted as he said, “Thanks for everything, Colonel. I’ve -learned a lot from you.” - -Willie had been unusually silent during the call. Now he said, -“Good-bye, Jim. Take care of yourself. I’ll miss you more——” his voice -broke and he could not finish what he wanted to say. - -Jim clapped Willie’s shoulder affectionately. “Good-bye, Willie. You -stay with Colonel Clark and the Long-Knives and you’ll be all right. See -you in June.” - - [Illustration: uncaptioned] - - - - - _Jim Long-Knife_ - - - _By_ - FLORANCE WALTON TAYLOR - - _Illustrated by_ - DIRK GRINGHUIS - -Boys and girls living at the time of our War of Independence, took an -active part in that struggle. Out West, they not only fought the -British, but the Indians as well. Kaskaskia and Vincennes were not just -towns, but stood for hard battle and hard won victory. - -Jim Hudson, named Jim Long-Knife by Chief Minnemung is a pioneer boy -living in Kentucky. How he is separated from his parents, how he lives -with the Indians, and how he fights alongside George Rogers Clark, is a -story filled with suspense and courage. Jim has good friends, including -the Indian boy Wahbunou, but it is his drum that, many times, keeps him -from danger. - -_Shemolsea_—Long-Knife is an important part of early western history—and -Jim helped make it so. - - - - - Transcriber’s Notes - - ---Silently corrected a few typos. - ---Retained publication information from the printed edition: this eBook - is public-domain in the country of publication. - ---In the text versions only, text in italics is delimited by - _underscores_. - - - -*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK JIM LONG-KNIFE *** - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the -United States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following -the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use -of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for -copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very -easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation -of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project -Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away--you may -do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected -by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark -license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country other than the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where - you are located before using this eBook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm website -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that: - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of -the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the Foundation as set -forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, -Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up -to date contact information can be found at the Foundation's website -and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without -widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our website which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This website includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/old/65942-0.zip b/old/65942-0.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 084d777..0000000 --- a/old/65942-0.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/65942-h.zip b/old/65942-h.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 45edb51..0000000 --- a/old/65942-h.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/65942-h/65942-h.htm b/old/65942-h/65942-h.htm deleted file mode 100644 index 4c53f95..0000000 --- a/old/65942-h/65942-h.htm +++ /dev/null @@ -1,4026 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> -<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en"> -<head> -<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=utf-8" /> -<meta http-equiv="Content-Style-Type" content="text/css" /> -<meta name="viewport" content="width=device-width, initial-scale=1.0" /> -<title>Jim Long-Knife, by Florance Walton Taylor—a Project Gutenberg eBook</title> -<meta name="author" content="Florance Walton Taylor" /> -<meta name="pss.pubdate" content="1959" /> -<link rel="coverpage" href="images/cover.jpg" /> -<link rel="spine" href="images/spine.jpg" /> -<link rel="schema.DC" href="http://dublincore.org/documents/1998/09/dces/" /> -<meta name="DC.Title" content="Jim Long-Knife" /> -<meta name="DC.Language" content="en" /> -<meta name="DC.Format" content="text/html" /> -<meta name="DC.Created" content="1959" /> -<meta name="DC.Creator" content="Florance Walton Taylor" /> -<meta name="DC.Contributor" content="Dirk Gringhuis" /> -<style type="text/css"> -table.twocol tr td { margin-left:2em; margin-right:2em; } /* BODY */ - -h1, h2, h3, h5, h6, .titlepg p { text-align:center; clear:right; text-indent:0; } /* HEADINGS */ -h1 { margin-top:3em; margin-left:auto;margin-right:auto; max-width:15em; } -.box h1, .box h2 { margin-top:.5em; margin-left:.5em; margin-right:.5em; } -hr.ddwide+h2, hr.ddwide+p.center, p.center+hr.ddwide { margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; } -hr.ddwide+h2#trnotes { margin-top:3em; } -h2, h3 { margin-top:3em; margin-bottom:2em; margin-left:auto; margin-right:auto; max-width: 17em; } -h2 { max-width: 17em; } -.box h2 { margin-top:.5em; margin-bottom:.5em; } -h2 .h2line1 { } -h2 .h2line2 { font-size:67%; } -h3 { font-size:110%; max-width: 22em; } -.box h3 { margin-top:1em; } -body .notop h3, body .notop p { margin-bottom:0; } -h6 { font-size:100%; font-style:italic; } -h6.var { font-size:80%; font-style:normal; } -.titlepg { margin-left:auto; margin-right:auto; border-style:double; clear:both; } -pre { font-family:serif; } - -/* == BOXES == */ -.dbox { border-style:double; } -div.box, .dbox { margin-right:auto; margin-left:auto; max-width:25em; clear:both; } -body div.notop { border-top:none; margin-bottom:1em; margin-top:1em; } -.nbox { margin-right:auto; margin-left:auto; max-width:18em;} -div.box, div.subbox, div.nbox { border-style:solid; border-width:1px; margin-top:2em; margin-bottom:2em; } -div.subbox { margin:.2em; } -div.box dl dd, div.subbox dl dd, div.nbox dl dd {margin-left:1em; font-size:90%; } -div.box dl dt, div.subbox dl dt, div.nbox dl dt {margin-left:3em; } -div.box p {margin-left:1em; margin-right:1em; max-width:70em; } -div.box div.verse {margin-left:3em; text-indent:0; margin-right:1em; } -h4 { font-size:80%; text-align:center; clear:right; } -span.chaptertitle { font-style:normal; display:block; text-align:center; font-size:150%; text-indent:0; } - -p, blockquote, li { text-align:justify; margin-right:auto; margin-left:auto; } /* PARAGRAPHS */ -pre { max-width:21em; } -p.bq, blockquote { margin-left:2em; margin-right:2em; margin-top:2em; margin-bottom:2em; } -blockquote p.bq { margin-left:1em; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:1em;} -div.verse { font-size:100%; } -p.indent { text-indent:2em; text-align:left; } -p.revint { text-indent:-2em; margin-left:2em; } -p.tb, p.tbcenter { margin-top:2em; } -table.center tr td.l, table.center tr th.l {text-align:left; margin-left:0em; text-indent:0em; } -table.center tr td.j {text-align:justify; } -table.center tr td.ltab { text-align:left; width:1.5em; } -table.center tr td.t {text-align:left; text-indent:1em; } -table.center tr td.t2 {text-align:left; text-indent:2em; } -table.center tr td.r, table.center tr th.r {text-align:right; } -table.center tr th.rx { width:4.5em; text-align:right; } -table.center tr th {vertical-align:bottom; } -table.center tr td {vertical-align:top; } - -span.pb, div.pb, dt.pb, p.pb /* PAGE BREAKS */ -{ text-align:right; float:right; margin-right:0em; clear:right; } -div.pb { display:inline; } -.pb, dt.pb, dl.toc dt.pb, dl.tocl dt.pb, .index dt.pb, dl.undent dt.pb { text-align:right; float:right; margin-left: 1.5em; - margin-top:.5em; margin-bottom:.5em; display:inline; text-indent:0; - font-size:80%; font-style:normal; font-weight:bold; - color:gray; border:1px solid gray;padding:1px 3px; } -div.index .pb { display:block; } -.bq div.pb, .bq span.pb { font-size:90%; margin-right:2em; } - - /* IMAGES */ -div.img, body a img, .imgcenter {text-align:center; margin-left:auto; margin-right:auto; margin-top:2em; margin-bottom:0em; clear:both; } -.caption {margin-top:0em; font-weight:bold; font-size:90%; } -img { max-width:100%; height:auto; } - -sup, a.fn { font-size:75%; vertical-align:100%; line-height:50%; font-weight:normal; } -.center, .tbcenter, .csmallest, .csmaller, .caption { text-align:center; clear:both; text-indent:0; } /* TEXTUAL MARKUP */ -table.center { clear:both; margin-right:auto; margin-left:auto; } -.small { font-size:80%; } -.smaller, .csmaller { font-size:66%; } -.smallest, .csmallest { font-size:50%; } -.larger, .xlarge { font-size:150%; } -.large { font-size:125%; } -.largest, .xxlarge { font-size:200%; } -.gs { letter-spacing:1em; } -.gs3 { letter-spacing:1.5em; } -.gslarge { letter-spacing:.3em; font-size:110%; } -.sc { font-variant:small-caps; font-style:normal; } -.sc i { font-variant:normal; } -.ss { font-family:sans-serif; } -.ssn { font-family:sans-serif; } -.cur { font-family:cursive; } -.rubric { color:red; font-weight:bold; } -hr { width:40%; margin-left:30%; clear:right; } -hr.dwide { width:80%; margin-left:10%; } -hr.ddwide { max-width:25em; width:100%; height:3px; margin-right:auto; margin-left:auto; margin-top:2em; } -h2+hr.ddwide {margin-top:0; } -.shorthr { width:20%; } -.jl { text-align:left; } -span.jl { float:left; } -.jr, .jr1 { text-align:right; } -span.jr, span.jr1, span.center, span.jl { display:block; } -.jr1 { margin-right:2em; } -.ind1 { text-align:left; margin-left:2em; } -.u { text-decoration:underline; } -.i { font-style:italic; } -.b { font-weight:bold; } -span.ou { text-decoration:overline underline; font-size:90%; font-family:sans-serif; font-weight:bold; font-variant:small-caps; } - -table.center { border-style: groove; } -div.stable table.center { border-style:none; } -table.center, table.hymntab { clear:both; margin-right:auto; margin-left:auto; } - -dd.t { text-align:left; margin-left: 5.5em; } - -span.date, span.author { text-align:right; font-variant:small-caps; display:block; margin-right:1em; } -span.center { text-align:center; display:block; text-indent:0; } -span.hst { margin-left:1.5em; } -.biblio dt { margin-top:1em; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em; } -.biblio dd { font-size:90%; } - -/* FOOTNOTE BLOCKS */ -div.notes p { margin-left:1em; text-indent:-1em; text-align:justify; max-width:25em; } -.fnblock { margin-top:2em; margin-right:auto; margin-left:auto; max-width:25em; } -.fndef { text-align:justify; margin-top:1.5em; margin-left:1.5em; text-indent:-1.5em; } -.fncont { margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:1em; text-indent:0; margin-left:1.5em; text-align:justify; } -.fndef p.fncont, .fndef dl { margin-left:0em; text-indent:0em; } -.fndef p.fnbq, .fndef dl { margin-left:1em; text-indent:0em; } - -.lnum { text-align:right; float:right; margin-left:.5em; /* POETRY LINE NUMBER */ -display:inline; } - -.hymn { text-align:left; } /* HYMN AND VERSE: HTML */ -.verse { text-align:left; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:1em; margin-left:0em; } -p.t0, p.l, .t0, .l, div.l, l { margin-left:4em; text-indent:-3em; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; text-align:left; } -p.tw, div.tw, .tw { margin-left:1em; text-indent:-1em; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; text-align:left; } -p.t, div.t, .t { margin-left:5em; text-indent:-3em; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; text-align:left; } -p.t2, div.t2, .t2 { margin-left:6em; text-indent:-3em; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; text-align:left; } -p.t3, div.t3, .t3 { margin-left:7em; text-indent:-3em; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; text-align:left; } -p.t4, div.t4, .t4 { margin-left:8em; text-indent:-3em; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; text-align:left; } -p.t5, div.t5, .t5 { margin-left:9em; text-indent:-3em; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; text-align:left; } -p.t6, div.t6, .t6 { margin-left:10em; text-indent:-3em; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; text-align:left; } -p.t7, div.t7, .t7 { margin-left:11em;text-indent:-3em; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; text-align:left; } -p.t8, div.t8, .t8 { margin-left:12em;text-indent:-3em; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; text-align:left; } -p.t9, div.t9, .t9 { margin-left:13em;text-indent:-3em; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; text-align:left; } -p.t10,div.t10,.t10 { margin-left:14em;text-indent:-3em; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; text-align:left; } -p.t11,div.t11,.t11 { margin-left:15em;text-indent:-3em; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; text-align:left; } -p.t12,div.t12,.t12 { margin-left:16em;text-indent:-3em; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; text-align:left; } -p.t13,div.t13,.t13 { margin-left:17em;text-indent:-3em; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; text-align:left; } -p.t14,div.t14,.t14 { margin-left:18em;text-indent:-3em; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; text-align:left; } -p.t15,div.t15,.t15 { margin-left:19em;text-indent:-3em; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; text-align:left; } -p.lc { margin-left:2em; text-indent:0; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; text-align:center; } - - /* CONTENTS (.TOC) */ - .toc dt.center { text-align:center; clear:both; margin-top:3em; margin-bottom:1em; text-indent:0; } - .toc dt { text-align:right; clear:left; font-variant:small-caps; - margin-left:auto; margin-right:auto; max-width:25em; } - .toc dt .cn { font-style:normal; } - .toc dt.jr { text-align:right; } - .toc dt.smaller { max-width:25em; } - .toc dd { text-align:right; clear:both; margin-left:2em; } - .toc dd.t { text-align:right; clear:both; margin-left:4em; text-indent:0em; } - .toc dt a, .toc dd a { text-align:left; clear:right; float:left; } - .toc dt.sc { text-align:right; clear:both; font-variant:small-caps; } - .toc dt.scl { text-align:left; clear:both; font-variant:small-caps; } - .toc dt.sct { text-align:right; clear:both; font-variant:small-caps; margin-left:1em; } - .toc dt.jl { text-align:left; clear:both; font-variant:normal; } - .toc dt.scc { text-align:center; clear:both; font-variant:small-caps; text-indent:0; } - .toc dt span.lj { text-align:left; display:block; float:left; } - .toc dt.jr { font-style:normal; } - .toc dt a span.cn, .toc dt span.cn, dt span.cn { width:3.5em; text-align:right; margin-right:.7em; float:left; } - dt .large {font-weight:bold; } - -.clear { clear:both; } -.htab { margin-left:8em; } - /* MAXWIDTH FOR JUVENILE BOOKS */ - p, blockquote, li, dd, dt, div.bcat, pre { text-align:justify; margin-right:auto; margin-left:auto; } - p, li, dd, dt, div.bcat, pre.internal dl { max-width:25em; margin-right:auto; margin-left:auto; } - p.smaller { max-width:40em; } - p.csmallest { max-width:40em; } - p.small { max-width:31.25em; } - blockquote { max-width:23em; } - div.verse { max-width:25em; margin-right:auto; margin-left:auto; } - div.bq { margin-left:auto; margin-right:auto; max-width:23em; } - - /* book advertisements */ - div.bcat dl dd { margin-left:4em; max-width:21em; } - div.bcat dl dt { text-indent:-2em; margin-left:2em; } - p.bkad {font-size:125%; font-weight:bold; margin-top:2em; max-width:20em; margin-right:auto; margin-left:auto; } - p.bkpr {font-size:90%; } - p.bkrv { } - dl.blist dt { margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em; } - dl.blist, dl.biblio { margin-left:auto; margin-right:auto; max-width:25em; } - - dl.int { margin-left:auto; margin-right:auto; max-width:25em; } - dl.int dt {margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em; } - dl.int dd {margin-left:2em; } -</style> -</head> -<body> - -<div style='text-align:center; font-size:1.2em; font-weight:bold'>The Project Gutenberg eBook of Jim Long-Knife, by Florance Walton Taylor</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and -most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms -of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online -at <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you -are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the -country where you are located before using this eBook. -</div> - -<p style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:1em; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Title: Jim Long-Knife</p> - -<div style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:1em; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Author: Florance Walton Taylor</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:1em; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Illustrator: Dirk Gringhuis</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>Release Date: July 28, 2021 [eBook #65942]</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>Language: English</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>Character set encoding: UTF-8</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Produced by: Stephen Hutcheson and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net</div> - -<div style='margin-top:2em; margin-bottom:4em'>*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK JIM LONG-KNIFE ***</div> -<div class="img"> -<img class="cover" id="coverpage" src="images/cover.jpg" alt="Jim Long-Knife" width="800" height="1151" /> -</div> -<div class="box"> -<h1><span class="ss">JIM LONG-KNIFE</span></h1> -<p class="center"><span class="ss">By Florance Walton Taylor</span></p> -<div class="img"> -<img src="images/p01a.jpg" alt="uncaptioned" width="500" height="315" /> -</div> -<p class="center"><span class="ss">Illustrated by -<br />Dirk Gringhuis</span></p> -<p class="tbcenter"><span class="ss">ALBERT WHITMAN & COMPANY -<br /><span class="small">Chicago<span class="hst"> Illinois</span></span></span></p> -</div> -<p class="center smaller">Second Printing 1967 -<br />Copyright 1959 by -<br />ALBERT WHITMAN & COMPANY -<br />L. C. Card 59-9656</p> -<p class="center smaller">Published simultaneously in the Dominion of Canada by George J. McLeod, Limited, Toronto. Printed in -<br />the U.S.A.</p> -<p class="center"><span class="sc">Dedication</span> -<br />To Alan’s three little queens; -<br />Elizabeth, -<br />Leslie, -<br />Sarah.</p> -<div class="img"> -<img src="images/p02.jpg" alt="uncaptioned" width="500" height="554" /> -</div> -<blockquote> -<p>Permission is gratefully acknowledged for the use -of material from “George Rogers Clark Papers” in -Vol. 8 of the <i>Collections</i> of the Illinois State Historical -Library, edited by James Alton James, copyright -1912.</p> -</blockquote> -<div class="img" id="pic1"> -<img src="images/p03.jpg" alt="" width="800" height="1026" /> -<p class="caption"><i>Minnemung</i></p> -</div> -<div class="pb" id="Page_5">5</div> -<h2>TABLE OF CONTENTS</h2> -<dl class="toc"> -<dt><span class="cn">I. </span><a href="#c1">A Strange Guest</a> 7</dt> -<dt><span class="cn">II. </span><a href="#c2">Was It a Trick?</a> 25</dt> -<dt><span class="cn">III. </span><a href="#c3">An Exchange at the Salt Lick</a> 42</dt> -<dt><span class="cn">IV. </span><a href="#c4">Winter with the Potawatomis</a> 57</dt> -<dt><span class="cn">V. </span><a href="#c5">The Long Knives</a> 74</dt> -<dt><span class="cn">VI. </span><a href="#c6">On to Kaskaskia</a> 94</dt> -<dt><span class="cn">VII. </span><a href="#c7">No Adoption</a> 108</dt> -<dt><span class="cn">VIII. </span><a href="#c8">A Peaceful Interval</a> 120</dt> -<dt><span class="cn">IX. </span><a href="#c9">Through the Drowned Lands</a> 137</dt> -<dt><span class="cn">X. </span><a href="#c10">Capture of Vincennes</a> 155</dt> -</dl> -<div class="pb" id="Page_6">6</div> -<div class="img"> -<img src="images/p04.jpg" alt="uncaptioned" width="800" height="1022" /> -</div> -<div class="pb" id="Page_7">7</div> -<div class="img"> -<img src="images/p04a.jpg" alt="uncaptioned" width="800" height="418" /> -</div> -<h2 id="c1"><span class="h2line1">Chapter I</span> -<br /><span class="h2line2">A STRANGE GUEST</span></h2> -<p>Thirteen-year-old Jim Hudson thumped a melon with -practiced fingers, then pulled it from the vine and laid it -in a pile with the others. He wiped his hot forehead with -his sweaty shirtsleeve, turning with a smile toward his -mother. “Look, Ma!” he called, “See how many melons -we have. And how fine the turnips and corn look.”</p> -<p>Ma Hudson, her rifle across her knees, was sitting on a -large stump in the little clearing. She turned at the sound -of Jim’s voice, and smiled wearily at her towheaded -boy. “Yes, Jim. We’ll have plenty to eat this winter, -I’m thinking.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_8">8</div> -<p>Jim moved on to another vine and glanced along the -row to where his father was kneeling. Ma pushed her -sunbonnet back over her faded yellow hair and resumed -her watch into the wilderness surrounding the clearing.</p> -<p>All during the spring and summer the Hudsons had -worked in this fashion. Jim and Pa had planted their -crops and enlarged the clearing by felling trees, while Ma -had sat ready with the Kentucky rifle, and looked for hostile -Indians.</p> -<p>This year of 1777 was a fearful one for Kentucky settlers. -Some had been captured or killed by Indians; -others had returned to Virginia discouraged by repeated -Indian attacks. The Hudsons, however, had not been -molested and Pa Hudson was determined to stay on his -land. It was the first farm he had ever owned; he loved -every inch of this lush Kentucky wilderness. He and -Jim continued to gather melons. Jim worked faster -than his father, because each time Pa moved from one -vine to another, he had to pick up his rifle lying close by -on the ground.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_9">9</div> -<p>Suddenly Jim raised his head and listened. Then he -turned to his father. “Pa, I hear something groaning. Do -you?”</p> -<p>Pa seized his rifle and was on his feet immediately. -“Where, son?”</p> -<p>Jim cocked his head toward the right. “Over there. -Listen. There it is again.”</p> -<p>At this moment Ma Hudson called, “Pa, I hear groaning.” -She was already picking her way among the -stumps toward the sound, the rifle grasped firmly in her -hands.</p> -<p>Pa went striding through the melon patch. “Wait, Ma. -Let me go first.” Soon he was ahead of her, with Jim beside -him.</p> -<p>The three made their way through the tangled brambles -into woods so dense the Hudsons seemed to be walking -in twilight. Quite suddenly they saw a bridled horse -standing quietly just ahead of them. In a moment the -groaning sound came again, this time to the left of where -Jim was standing.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_10">10</div> -<p>He whirled around, scrambled over a large fallen tree -and cried, “Why, here’s a boy! Kind of a small boy, too.” -Jim started to stoop down toward the prostrate form.</p> -<p>Pa sprang to his side. “Wait a minute, son.” He peered -through the gloom and saw an Indian boy smaller than -Jim, dressed in a long blue cloth shirt, his face streaked -with hideous vermilion. “Maybe this is a trick,” Pa muttered. -“Perhaps he’s been put here to lure us into a trap.” -Holding his rifle ready, Pa started looking about in the -shadowy woods.</p> -<p>Ma Hudson’s hands trembled as she held her rifle and -looked down at the boy. “Pa, he’s hurt. Look at his -shoulder. This is no trick.”</p> -<p>Pa handed his rifle to Jim. “You watch with Ma, while -I have a look at him.” He dropped to his knees to examine -the boy, mumbling, “I’m still afraid it’s an Indian -trick.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_11">11</div> -<p>As Pa turned the boy to one side, he saw an ugly wound -where the blue shirt was torn from one shoulder. Then -he looked closely at the wound. “Why, I can see a bone -too, Ma. I think he’s broken his shoulder.”</p> -<p>Ma forgot about the possibility of other Indians lurking -near, as she ventured closer to Pa to look at the boy again. -“Pa, he’s not as old as Jim. We’ll have to take care of him. -We can’t leave him here.”</p> -<p>“No, reckon we can’t,” Pa replied, as he tried to lift -the Indian boy from the tangled underbrush. But the -boy’s body was enmeshed in a stout wild grapevine. Pa -took out his long knife and began slashing at the tangled -vine.</p> -<p>At this moment, the Indian boy groaned and opened -his eyes. He looked up at the Hudsons in alarm. When he -saw Pa’s long knife, he was terrified and cried out, “<i>Shemolsea! -Shemolsea!</i>”</p> -<p>“What did you say?” Jim asked, but the boy had lost -consciousness again.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_12">12</div> -<p>When Pa had freed the boy from the vine, he gathered -him in his arms and turned to Jim. “You go ahead -with the rifle, Jim, and Ma, you walk behind me. Mind -you both keep a sharp lookout. We’ll have to take him -back to the cabin.”</p> -<p>“But Pa,” put in Jim, “what’ll we do about the horse?” -He nodded toward the animal standing a few feet away.</p> -<p>“Bring him along. And tie him up in our lean-to next -to Nellie. But not too close to our horse. She might nip -him.”</p> -<p>The Hudsons took the boy and his horse back to their -cabin without seeing another human being. While Jim -tethered the horse at a safe distance from Nellie, Ma flew -about the cabin getting water, her home-made soap, and -clean rags for Pa. He set the wounded boy’s broken bone -as best he could, supporting it with a rude splint. Then -with Ma’s help, he washed the wound with soap and -bound the shoulder with rags to hold the bone securely in -place.</p> -<p>When they had finished Pa shook his head. “I’m -afraid he’s lost a lot of blood. He’ll be a while getting -well.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_13">13</div> -<p>Ma turned to Jim who was standing in the doorway of -the cabin. “Jim, we’ll have to put him in your bed. He’s -awfully weak.”</p> -<p>Jim nodded. “Sure, Ma. He’s welcome to it. I can -sleep on the floor.”</p> -<p>Pa Hudson laid the boy carefully on Jim’s bed, muttering -all the while. “I don’t like harboring an Indian in my -house. No, sir, I don’t.” Then he turned to Jim. “You -stand guard at the door with Ma’s rifle and I’ll go back -for the melons. Some Indians might come swooping in -here to get him.”</p> -<p>Ma’s eyes flashed as she stooped to pick up her rifle -from the floor. “No, Jim. You go help your pa. I’ll -stand guard.”</p> -<p>“All right. We’ll be right back,” Jim said; he dashed -out to join his father.</p> -<p>When they had brought all the melons up to the cabin -and stacked them in the shade, they fed and watered the -Indian boy’s horse. Inside the cabin again they found the -boy sound asleep. Now and then, Ma glanced at him as -she prepared supper. “Shall we wake him, Pa, and give -him something to eat?”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_14">14</div> -<p>Pa studied the Indian for a few minutes. “No. He’s -breathing all right but seems in pain. Probably wouldn’t -want to eat anyway. Let’s not bother him.”</p> -<p>After supper the Hudsons conversed in low tones. -“Where do you suppose he came from, Pa?” Ma asked.</p> -<p>Pa shrugged. “I’ve no idea, but now we know the Indians -have been near our farm.”</p> -<p>Ma’s blue eyes widened and she shivered slightly. “It -makes me fearful, Pa. I’ve never really been afraid before.” -She laid a thin, work-worn hand on her husband’s -brawny one. “Let’s go back to Virginia.”</p> -<p>Jim glanced quickly at his father and saw Pa’s face set -in a stubborn mask. He was not surprised to hear his father -say, “We can’t go all the way back there alone, Ma. -It’s too dangerous. And there’s nothing back in Virginia -for us. We were indentured servants, remember. I want -to hang on to our farm, all four hundred acres of it.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_15">15</div> -<p>Ma sighed and smoothed back her faded blond hair. -“But we’re free now, Pa. We finished our time of service -before we came out here three years ago. And I’d like -Jim to have some schooling.”</p> -<p>Pa shook his head. “There’d be no future for us in Virginia. -We have no money to start back there. Here we -have land, our own land. And this is going to be a wonderful -country. As for school, you can teach Jim the way -you’ve been doing. Weren’t you a governess in one of the -big houses of Virginia?”</p> -<p>Jim had been looking from one to the other of his parents, -his clear blue eyes sparkling. “Please, Ma,” he said, -“I want to stay here. You can teach me lots more, and I -can help Pa to clear and plant the land.”</p> -<p>Pa nodded to Jim and smiled in approval. “There’s -big men out here, too, from the finest families of Virginia. -Men like James Harrod, Robert Todd, Simon Kenton -and George Rogers Clark.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_16">16</div> -<p>“You certainly remember Clark, Ma. His father’s land -joined where we worked. George Rogers Clark will figure -out some way to stop the redskins. You surely don’t -intend to let one lone Indian boy scare you away from our -home.”</p> -<p>Ma tried to smile. “No. No Pa, of course not. But we -can’t be sure there aren’t other Indians near at hand.”</p> -<p>“That’s true,” Pa agreed. “You and Jim go to bed. -I’ll sit up for a while and listen for any unusual sounds.”</p> -<p>Ma shook her head. “I’ll stay up with you. Jim, I’ll -make a pallet for you.” She got up and fixed a comfortable -bed on the floor for Jim. Then she sat down in the -cabin doorway beside her husband.</p> -<p>Jim glanced at the Indian boy lying so quietly in his -bed, dropped down on the pallet and went to sleep.</p> -<p>Ma and Pa Hudson continued to sit in the doorway, -rifles by their side, and to stare out into the silent black -night.</p> -<p>When Jim awakened the next morning, Ma had breakfast -ready and the Indian boy was looking solemnly at -him from his bed.</p> -<p>Jim jumped up. “Good morning, boy,” he said with a -smile. “What’s your name?”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_17">17</div> -<p>The Indian boy did not reply but kept his brown eyes -fixed on Jim.</p> -<p>Ma put a pewter bowl containing steaming hot grits at -Jim’s place on the table. “Wash your hands and face, -son.”</p> -<p>“Yes’m.” Jim poured some water into the washbasin -and began splashing water on his face and hands. As -soon as he had finished he carried a pan of water to their -strange guest, so he could wash his face.</p> -<p>But the Indian boy just stared at him and did not move.</p> -<p>Ma came over and stood beside the boy. “Come now, -boy,” she said briskly, “I’ll wash your hands and face. -Then you must have some breakfast.” As she turned one -hand over and began to wash it, he tried to sit up, but fell -back on the bed with a groan.</p> -<p>“Poor boy. Your shoulder must hurt badly.” Ma tried -to soothe him as she continued with the washing. “I’ll -have to get this awful stuff off your face.” But when she -began scrubbing his face, he groaned again and tried to -turn away.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_18">18</div> -<p>“Maybe it means something to him to wear that vermilion -streak,” Jim suggested. “Looks like mud, doesn’t -it? Or it could be he doesn’t like water.”</p> -<p>Ma wasn’t able to get the Indian boy’s face thoroughly -clean. She brought a bowl of hot grits to him. “Here, -boy, try to eat some of this.” She held a spoonful of grits -to his lips.</p> -<p>The boy tasted it gingerly, found it good and opened -his mouth for more. Ma fed him the contents of the bowl -while Jim and Pa ate their breakfast.</p> -<p>For several days the Hudsons’ strange guest rested in -Jim’s bed. Now and then he tried to sit up only to lie -down again with a low moan. With Ma’s good food, -however, and excellent care, he did improve and seemed -to be less frightened at being with the white family.</p> -<p>Little by little he and Jim began trying to talk to each -other. By signs, gestures, and a word or two, each boy -began to learn a few words of the other’s language.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_19">19</div> -<p>Jim learned that the Indian boy’s name was Wahbunou, -which meant The Juggler, and that he had been -pulled from his horse when it galloped under a large -thorn tree. One of the low branches had brushed him off -and a large thorn had pierced his shoulder. He had fallen -on a jagged stump and into the tangled wild grapevine, -where the Hudsons had found him. But Jim was not -able to find out what he was doing near their clearing.</p> -<p>As for Pa, he was disturbed because the Indian boy had -been riding so near their farm. Every night after Ma and -Jim were asleep, he rose from his bed and sat in the cabin -doorway with his rifle ready. But no Indians appeared.</p> -<p>Sometime later Wahbunou was able to be up and about -in the cabin. He would watch Pa clean and oil his Deckard -rifle, but he never offered to touch it. Soon he began -walking around the clearing with Jim and Ma Hudson. -He followed Ma everywhere, gratitude for her care shining -in his brown eyes.</p> -<p>One morning Pa said, “We’d best have a look at that -shoulder, Wahbunou, to see if it’s healing properly.” But -when Pa tried to remove the rag bandage, Wahbunou -jerked away like a wounded animal, terror in his eyes.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_20">20</div> -<p>“Come now, Wahbunou, I just want to look at it,” Pa -said. “I promise not to hurt you.”</p> -<p>But Wahbunou would not permit Pa to touch the -bandage.</p> -<p>“Maybe I can show him something new, Pa, and get -him calmed down a bit so you can have a look,” Jim suggested. -“I’ll get your drum, Pa. Maybe he’s never seen a -drum.”</p> -<p>Pa shrugged. “Indians have drums, Jim, though not -like ours. All right, get it down for him.”</p> -<p>Jim climbed on a chair and lifted Pa’s drum from its -place on the top of Ma’s high cupboard. “Look, Wahbunou.” -Jim took the drumsticks and played a short ruffle -on the drum.</p> -<p>Wahbunou seemed interested; he smiled as he reached -for one of the sticks. He grasped it gingerly, turning it -over and over, finally returning it to Jim who played another -ruffle and a loud roll. Wahbunou smiled again and -reached for the drum.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_21">21</div> -<p>Jim nodded. “If you let Pa look at your shoulder, you -may have it.” Jim pointed to the Indian boy’s shoulder -and then to his father.</p> -<p>Wahbunou drew back, but finally nodded.</p> -<p>Pa took the bandage off, and gently pulled the rough -splint back far enough to look at the boy’s shoulder. Then -as gently, he replaced it. “Your wound is healing fine, -Wahbunou. Soon you’ll be as good as new.”</p> -<p>Jim handed the drum to Wahbunou and the Indian -boy beat out a queer, rhythmical sound with the palm of -his hand. He didn’t seem to know how to use the drumsticks. -Then the boys took turns beating it. Jim could -make many fancy rolls and ruffles, but Wahbunou could -make only the one sound.</p> -<p>One day was like another at the cabin until nights began -to grow much cooler. Pa said any day now there -would be a frost, so they’d soon have to harvest the turnips -and corn.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_22">22</div> -<p>Wahbunou’s shoulder healed nicely and Pa finally took -off the bandage and splint. Now that it was cooler and -his shirt was in shreds, Ma said Wahbunou should have a -new outfit of clothes. She had been sewing for Pa and -Jim, so she made Wahbunou a homespun shirt and trousers. -In his new clothes Wahbunou looked like any Kentucky -boy, save for his copper-colored skin and straight, -coarse black hair.</p> -<p>Not many days after Pa had removed Wahbunou’s -bandage, Ma awakened Pa and Jim earlier than usual. -“Jim! Pa!” she cried. “Wake up! He’s gone.”</p> -<p>“Gone! Who’s gone?” Pa asked.</p> -<p>“Wahbunou. He’s not in his bed.”</p> -<p>Jim had scrambled into his clothes. “He’s probably -outside, Ma,” he cried as he dashed out-of-doors. But -when Jim looked around their dooryard and in the shed, -he saw that Wahbunou’s horse was gone. He ran back -into the house. “Pa, Wahbunou <i>must</i> be gone. His horse -isn’t in the shed with Nellie, either.”</p> -<p>The Hudsons could not believe that Wahbunou would -leave without telling them good-bye; they spent a long -time looking for him. But Wahbunou and his horse were -nowhere in sight.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_23">23</div> -<p>Finally Ma fixed breakfast. As she put bowls on the table, -she sighed and said, “I can’t understand why he -wanted to leave us. He recovered so nicely and seemed -happy here.”</p> -<p>Jim looked up from his food. “But Ma, maybe he -wanted to go back to his own people. I sure would if I -were with the Indians or some other strange folks.”</p> -<p>Ma shrugged and brushed her hair back from her -forehead. “That was the wrong thing for him to do, Jim——go -away without telling us good-bye. Sneaking off -in the night.”</p> -<p>Pa looked up at his wife, his brown eyes thoughtful. -“Now, Ma, I don’t think he did anything so wrong. He -was probably afraid we would try to keep him from going, -so he just left quietly in the night. I don’t believe he -was ungrateful. As Jim says, he probably longed for his -own people.”</p> -<p>Jim finished his breakfast in silence and then suddenly -said, “Do you suppose some of the Indians came for -him?” Jim’s eyes flashed in excitement.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_24">24</div> -<p>Pa picked up his rifle and put on his homespun jacket. -“I don’t think they did, Jim, but I’ll have a look around to -see if there are new tracks of any kind. I believe I would -have heard them. He probably just rode off alone.”</p> -<p>Ma began to take away the pewter bowls. “I don’t like -it at all. I feel queer, as if we were surrounded by Indians. -I’m afraid we aren’t safe here any more.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_25">25</div> -<div class="img"> -<img src="images/p05.jpg" alt="uncaptioned" width="800" height="398" /> -</div> -<h2 id="c2"><span class="h2line1">Chapter II</span> -<br /><span class="h2line2">WAS IT A TRICK?</span></h2> -<p>Not long after Wahbunou’s disappearance, a chill north -wind blew into the lush Kentucky valley, warning the -Hudsons that winter was not far away. Frosty mornings -greeted them, and the trees putting on their mantles of -brown, red and gold, told them it was time to harvest -both turnips and corn.</p> -<p>Jim and Pa spent several days gathering them, while -Ma did sentinel duty sitting on a stump with her rifle -ready for use. But she was uneasy while on guard, jumping -at each snap of a twig.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_26">26</div> -<p>Finally the corn was shucked and piled high in one -corner of the cabin. Pa stored the turnips in a deep hole -near the lean-to, so they would keep all winter. One nippy -day when the harvest was finished, Pa turned to Jim after -breakfast. “Jim, let’s go hunting today. I’d like to lay in -a supply of game before it gets any colder.”</p> -<p>Jim’s blue eyes sparkled. “Today, Pa?”</p> -<p>“Today’s as good as any time, Jim.”</p> -<p>Ma looked troubled. “Must you go, Pa?”</p> -<p>Pa nodded and patted his wife’s shoulder awkwardly. -“Now Ma, you’ve been nervous and upset ever since -Wahbunou went away. I’d think you’d want us to go -hunting. Only yesterday you said you were tired of living -on rabbit. You’ll be all right here, but don’t leave the -cabin. We’ll be home by early evening.”</p> -<p>Ma squared her shoulders and bristled a little. “Pa, I -haven’t been any more upset than usual. You know I’ve -never liked this country; I want to go back to Virginia.” -She sighed. “I do know we need fresh meat. Well, I’ll -spend the day spinning my flax.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_27">27</div> -<p>Pa’s brown eyes sparkled in relief. “That’s a good girl, -Ma. Who knows? Maybe we’ll get a deer. Then you’ll -have a deerskin to make a jacket and some leggings.”</p> -<p>“Or maybe we’ll get a bear,” Jim boasted.</p> -<p>Soon they were ready to go. Jim was dressed exactly -like his father. Each wore home-made moccasins, fur -caps, loose thin homespun trousers, topped by long -fringed hunting shirts reaching nearly to their knees. -Their shirts were held in at the waist by broad belts.</p> -<p>Pa hung his long knife from his belt and Jim started -down the clearing, carrying Pa’s heavy flintlock rifle. It -was as long as Jim was tall and difficult for him to carry, -but he tried to manage it proudly.</p> -<p>As Pa went striding through the thick woods, Jim did -his best to keep up with him. Now and then a squirrel -darted along in front of them, or a few wild turkeys flew -over their heads, frightened by their approach.</p> -<p>Jim stopped and started to raise his rifle. “Let’s shoot -some turkeys, Pa. Ma always likes to cook turkey.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_28">28</div> -<p>Pa smiled and shook his head. “Not now, Jim. We’re -out for bigger game. On the way back we’ll bag a few -squirrels and turkeys. Then we won’t have to carry them -so far.”</p> -<p>A little farther on, Pa said, “If you should happen to -see a bear or deer, Jim, don’t be in a hurry to fire. Wait -until the animal is close to you. That Deckard works best -if you fire it at close range. Always remember, son, don’t -get excited and fire too soon.”</p> -<p>“I’ll remember, Pa.”</p> -<p>Along about noon Jim suddenly froze in his tracks, -certain that he had seen a deer. Pa stopped, glanced in -the direction Jim was looking and nodded. The deer evidently -had not picked up their scent, as it continued to -wander slowly toward them.</p> -<p>Without a sound Jim brought his rifle to rest in a -nearby tree notch and waited. When it seemed the approaching -deer would surely see them, he fired.</p> -<p>“Good boy, Jim,” Pa cried excitedly. “You got him on -the first shot.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_29">29</div> -<div class="img"> -<img src="images/p06.jpg" alt="uncaptioned" width="800" height="1090" /> -</div> -<div class="pb" id="Page_30">30</div> -<p>Jim was elated because it was his very first deer. Of -course he had shot rabbits near their cabin, but a deer -was a real triumph. Pa cut a long limb from a tree and -stripped off its branches. Then he trussed the deer’s legs -with a long strip of wild grapevine.</p> -<p>“Now, Jim, help me to run this limb between the deer’s -legs, so we can carry it easily.”</p> -<p>In a jiffy they had the deer slung from the limb. Pa -put one end of the limb on Jim’s shoulder and the other -on his own, so they could carry the animal through the -forest without difficulty. It was a fine young buck, and -would furnish plenty of meat for them, perhaps even a -new hunting shirt.</p> -<p>“Better give me the rifle now, Jim. It’s most too heavy -for you with that limb on your shoulder. We’ll work our -way home by Coon Hollow Trace. There’s always plenty -of game in that neighborhood.”</p> -<p>When they arrived at Coon Hollow, a small crossroads -in the forest, Jim said, “Look, Pa. I think I see someone -coming down that trace.” He nodded toward the north.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_31">31</div> -<p>Instantly Pa laid the deer on the ground and held his -rifle ready. He peered ahead for a moment, then said, -“I see two men, Jim, and I think one’s leading a pack -horse. We’ll wait a little.”</p> -<p>As the men came nearer, Pa suddenly recognized the -taller one. “George Rogers Clark! As I live and -breathe.” Then he raised his arm in greeting. “Howdy, -Mr. Clark. I don’t reckon you remember me. I’m Jim -Hudson. I used to work the land bordering your father’s -farm back in Virginia. And this is my son, Jim.”</p> -<p>The tall, red-haired man looked at Pa Hudson for a -moment and then smiled, his hazel eyes shining and -friendly. He shook hands with Jim, then with Pa. “Of -course I remember you, Hudson.” He gestured toward -his companion. “This is Tom Shelton. He’s one of the -settlers going back to Virginia with me.”</p> -<p>“Howdy,” Tom Shelton said, shaking Pa’s hand.</p> -<p>George Rogers Clark looked inquiringly at the Hudsons. -Then he asked, “What are you doing out here so -far from Virginia?”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_32">32</div> -<p>“We came out here three years ago,” Pa replied, “to -take up a claim. It’s wonderful land; my boy and I are -clearing it as fast as we can.”</p> -<p>While Pa talked about his dreams for his claim, Jim -stared at the splendidly built man his father had called -Mr. Clark. He was taller than Pa, young too, and most -impressive-looking.</p> -<p>Tom Shelton shook his head when Pa paused for -breath. “No more Kentucky for me. I’m beat. I can’t -take these Indian raids any longer. Last week finished -me. My nearest neighbors were attacked and taken prisoners. -I got all my possessions with me.” He nodded toward -the heavily laden pack horse. “Many of us settlers -are going back with Colonel Clark. Better join us, Hudson.”</p> -<p>“Colonel Clark!” Pa exclaimed. “So you’re a colonel -now, sir.”</p> -<p>The colonel seemed not to have heard Pa’s exclamation. -He shook his head gravely. “This Indian situation -is bad. They’re more stirred up than ever this season.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_33">33</div> -<p>Pa bristled. “There’s no Indians going to scare me off -my land. I got a good warm cabin and quite a few acres -cleared. I’m staying.”</p> -<p>Colonel Clark nodded and smiled. “I like your spirit, -Hudson, but if I were you, I’d take my family and crops -up to Harrodsburg. Stay there until these Indians quiet -down a little.”</p> -<p>Pa shook his head. “I mean to stay, sir. I got through -last winter all right. We’ve never been molested.”</p> -<p>Colonel Clark put his hand on Pa’s shoulder. “We -could use more brave men like you out here, Hudson, but -the Indians are really on the warpath now. I can’t prove -it, but I hear Hamilton’s paying the Indians for all of the -prisoners they deliver to him at Detroit—paying them -well, too.”</p> -<p>“Hamilton? Who’s he, sir?”</p> -<p>“The British commander in charge of all the western -country, stationed at Detroit. I hear he’s got the Indians -really aroused. Better take your family to Harrodsburg -for a while.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_34">34</div> -<p>Pa scratched his ear. “Harrodsburg? That’s a far piece -from here. Why not to McClellan’s Fort?”</p> -<p>The colonel looked grim. “Haven’t you heard, Hudson? -Burned out by the Indians early this year.”</p> -<p>“Think it over, Hudson,” put in Tom Shelton. “Better -stay alive in the fort than dead on your claim. Or better -yet, go back to Virginia with us. We’ll be leaving in a -few days, won’t we, Colonel?”</p> -<p>Clark nodded. “As soon as I get the settlers together -who want to go back with me. I’ll be back in the spring.”</p> -<p>Pa shifted from one foot to the other. “That’s good -news, sir, that you’ll be back. Thanks for your advice. -I’ll think it over, but I’m not going back to Virginia. We -got to be getting along home now.”</p> -<p>The colonel shook hands again with Pa and Jim. -“Glad to have seen you, Hudson. Good luck. Better get -up to Harrodsburg as soon as you can.” He and Shelton -moved off along the trace.</p> -<p>When the men had gone and Jim and Pa had been -trudging along for a while, Jim asked, “Pa, should we go -to Harrodsburg?”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_35">35</div> -<p>Pa didn’t reply for so long Jim was afraid he had made -him angry. Finally Pa sighed and said, “I know your -ma has been mighty upset since Wahbunou disappeared. -And Colonel Clark’s not one to be aroused without cause. -Maybe we ought to take our meat and provisions to the -fort, at least until this Indian scare blows over. I wouldn’t -want anything to happen to you and Ma.”</p> -<p>“But I wouldn’t want to lose our farm, Pa.”</p> -<p>“We wouldn’t lose it, Jim. No Indian’s going to squat -very long on our land. They’re a roving people. The -worst they could do would be to burn our cabin, and we -could build another one, I guess. But I haven’t made up -my mind yet, Jim. Better not say anything to your ma -about our meeting with Colonel Clark today. No use getting -her excited.”</p> -<p>“No,” Jim agreed. “She’s upset enough as it is.”</p> -<p>“If I decide we should go,” Pa continued, “she’ll be -glad enough to leave the farm and stay at the fort. So -mind now, not a word to Ma.”</p> -<p>Jim nodded. “I wouldn’t want to worry Ma.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_36">36</div> -<p>On the way home they shot a squirrel and several wild -turkeys, so when they arrived at their cabin, they were -well laden with the day’s trophies.</p> -<p>“Oh, Pa!” Ma cried, running out to meet them, her -blond hair flying. “I thought you’d never come.” She -clapped her hands when she saw the deer hanging from -the limb. “Oh, a deer! Now we’ll have plenty of meat.”</p> -<p>Pa smiled and pointed toward Jim. “He shot the deer, -Ma. Got him on the first shot. We have a squirrel and -some turkeys too, so we’ve a lot of work to do these next -few days, jerking this meat.”</p> -<p>The next morning was quite cold as a north wind had -risen in the valley during the night. But the Hudsons began -working early anyway. Jim helped Pa cut the deer -meat into long strips and spread it to dry in the sun.</p> -<p>Pa glanced toward the sun. “I think maybe we’ll have -to smoke this meat after all, Jim. This sun isn’t warm -enough to cure meat.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_37">37</div> -<p>Once the norther had passed, however, the weather did -warm considerably; Pa said they were feeling the last -breath of summer. While father and son worked with the -meat, Ma made two new shirts for them and a linsey -woolsey dress for herself. She didn’t mention Indians -again, but she seemed to be uneasy as soon as night fell.</p> -<p>On the evening they had the meat laid by, Pa said casually -to his wife, “Ma, I think we’ll take our provisions -and go up to Harrodsburg for a while.”</p> -<p>Jim glanced quickly at his father to see if he had seen -or heard anything alarming, but Pa’s face showed nothing -at all.</p> -<p>Ma gasped in surprise. “To Harrodsburg, Pa? Do you -mean to the fort? Why?”</p> -<p>“Well, I’ve noticed you seem mighty jumpy lately and -I thought we’d take our provisions and join the settlers at -the fort for a while. It would give you a rest and a chance -to hear the news and talk to someone else besides me and -Jim. It would be a change.”</p> -<p>Ma’s face glowed in anticipation and relief. “Oh, Pa, -let’s do it. Let’s go tomorrow before winter sets in and -makes us prisoners here.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_38">38</div> -<p>Pa shook his head. “I’m not sure we can go tomorrow. -But we’ll start packing.”</p> -<p>Ma leaned forward in her chair and searched her husband’s -face anxiously. “What’s made you decide to leave -our cabin, Pa? Have you seen signs of Indians?”</p> -<p>Jim looked at his father again as Pa replied almost too -casually, “Haven’t seen anything, Ma. But we’ve done -the chores and the harvesting, so we can leave the farm -for a spell now. Just got a hankering to see people.”</p> -<p>Pa’s answer seemed to satisfy Ma Hudson because she -was up early next morning, and beginning to pack before -Jim and Pa were awake. “I’ll take my pots and the spinning -wheel,” she said after breakfast, glancing around -their cabin.</p> -<p>Pa shook his head. “You can’t take all that stuff, Ma. -We’ve only one horse, remember. We can’t put everything -we own on Nellie’s back. They’ll have cooking -utensils at the fort and I’m sure some one will have a -spinning wheel. We’ll take just the corn, turnips and -all of our meat.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_39">39</div> -<p>“May I take your drum, Pa?” put in Jim. “I’ll carry it. -I can have fun playing it for the other boys at the fort.”</p> -<p>Pa hesitated, glancing up at the drum. Then he -smiled. “I guess if you want to be responsible for it, you -may take the drum. But mind, you hang on to it.”</p> -<p>Finally they had the corn packed in two stout cloth -sacks and hung on one side of their horse’s saddle. Pa -put the meat in a peddler’s pack which he had brought -from Virginia, with most of the turnips on top of the -meat. This pack he slung from the other side of the -horse’s saddle.</p> -<p>Ma had tied a change of clothes and moccasins for each -of them in a large square of cloth.</p> -<p>When they were ready to leave, Ma sat on the horse, -holding the pack of clothes, while Pa led the horse with -one hand and carried his trusty Deckard with the other. -Jim walked behind the horse, carrying Ma’s rifle, the -treasured drum and drumsticks.</p> -<p>As they left their clearing Pa said, “We’ll come home -as soon as we can.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_40">40</div> -<p>They trudged along silently, their moccasins and the -horse’s hoofs, swishing softly through the fallen leaves. -Sometimes Ma hummed softly to herself as if she were -happy to be on the way to Harrodsburg. But Pa gazed -resolutely ahead.</p> -<p>They heard no other sounds for a mile or so.</p> -<p>Then without warning, they found themselves surrounded -by a dozen hideously painted Indians. Neither -Pa nor Jim could raise their rifles before the Indians had -seized and securely bound them.</p> -<p>In trying to raise his rifle, Jim had dropped his drum -and sticks, but he was too frightened to notice this.</p> -<p>Ma screamed in terror as one of the Indians leaped -upon her horse Nellie, tied Ma’s hands and rode off with -her into the woods. Two other Indians tied leather -thongs around Jim and Pa’s waists and began dragging -them along behind Ma’s captor.</p> -<p>The rest of the band picked up the rifles, drum and -sticks and followed along, their whooping and yelling -piercing the calm autumn stillness.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_41">41</div> -<p>Jim was terrified. He wondered if his father were; yet -he could do nothing but stumble along behind the Indian -who kept jerking the leather thong.</p> -<p>Although Jim was frightened, he did not forget what -Pa had said when they found Wahbunou in the woods. -Had it been a trick? Were these Indians some of Wahbunou’s -people? Was this the thanks the Hudsons received -for caring for him?</p> -<div class="img"> -<img src="images/p07.jpg" alt="uncaptioned" width="500" height="509" /> -</div> -<div class="pb" id="Page_42">42</div> -<div class="img"> -<img src="images/p08.jpg" alt="uncaptioned" width="800" height="456" /> -</div> -<h2 id="c3"><span class="h2line1">Chapter III</span> -<br /><span class="h2line2">AN EXCHANGE AT THE SALT LICK</span></h2> -<p>The Indians dragged Jim and his father rapidly -through the woods until the Hudsons thought they could -go no farther. They were happy to reach a small clearing -where more Indians were waiting with their women, -children and extra horses. To Jim’s relief he saw his -mother still sitting on their old Nellie.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_43">43</div> -<p>During her ride, Ma’s usually neat blond hair had -fallen down over her shoulders. Half a dozen women -were crowding around her, fingering her hair and talking -excitedly to each other. When they caught sight of Jim’s -towhead, they laughed and ran their fingers over his -hair, too.</p> -<p>Several men were going through the peddler’s pack of -food. After one look, they dumped the turnips on the -ground. But the meat they carefully repacked.</p> -<p>Pa tried to smile reassuringly at Ma and Jim, but one -of the men clapped him on the head, picked him up as -though he were a feather and dumped him head down -across a horse. Then the Indian climbed on behind him. -In a moment a second man had done the same to Jim. -At once the band rode off with their three white prisoners -toward the north.</p> -<p>About dusk they stopped for the night by a small -stream. Pulling the Hudsons from their horses, they tied -Pa and Jim to one tree, Ma to another. Several women -began making fires and filling kettles with water; while -other women prepared supper. The children laughed -and scampered in and out of the stream. The men paid -no attention to their three white prisoners, but sat quietly -along the bank of the stream, talking in very low tones.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_44">44</div> -<p>Jim’s head ached so badly from his jolting, upside-down -ride through the woods that he could scarcely see. -He was glad, though, that his parents were still with him. -He looked at the half-grown children playing around the -camp, expecting to see Wahbunou, but the boy was not -among them.</p> -<p>Ma Hudson was still so frightened she couldn’t talk, -but she was not so shaken up as Pa or Jim, because she at -least had ridden upright.</p> -<p>When supper was ready, one old woman brought scant -servings of stew in small gourds to the Hudsons, and three -small dry corncakes. Ma wasn’t able to eat a bite, but Pa -and Jim found the stew surprisingly good. They could -have eaten another helping, but the woman did not bring -them any more.</p> -<p>After the Indians had eaten their fill, the women -banked the fires for the night; men and boys relaxed on -the ground. Poor Ma Hudson had either fainted from -fright or had fallen into an exhausted sleep.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_45">45</div> -<p>Pa turned his head slightly toward Jim and whispered, -“I’m afraid it was a trick, Jim. Putting Wahbunou with -his injured shoulder near our clearing, I mean. He probably -reported we could be taken prisoner easily, since we -had no near neighbors to help us.”</p> -<p>Jim glanced toward the Indian group, then at his father. -“But, Pa, Wahbunou isn’t with these Indians. All -the men and boys are sitting right over there together. -Besides, we don’t even know if this is Wahbunou’s tribe.”</p> -<p>Pa looked at the group. Then he nodded his head. -“You’re right, son. He isn’t there.”</p> -<p>Jim wriggled a bit trying to loosen the thongs which -bound him, but with no success. “I wonder what they’ll -do with us now, Pa.”</p> -<p>Pa tried to shake his dark hair away from his eyes. -“Well, since they didn’t kill us on the spot, I wonder if -they intend to deliver us to Hamilton in Detroit. You -remember Colonel Clark said the British commander -there was paying the Indians to bring white prisoners to -him.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_46">46</div> -<p>Jim nodded. “Yes, I remember. But why, Pa? And -where is this Detroit?”</p> -<p>“You remember when I was in Harrodsburg last year -I heard about Great Britain waging a war with our countrymen -back east. Now I think this British Hamilton in -Detroit is figuring on winning all our Kentucky territory -by having the Indians fight for him. They are to scare the -settlers into returning back home or to capture them for -Hamilton. I’m not sure where Detroit is, but I think it -lies far to the north.”</p> -<p>Jim glanced toward the Indians again. “Look, Pa. -They have our rifles and drum.”</p> -<p>Two men were examining the rifles carefully, while the -rest of the Indians were passing drum and sticks from -hand to hand. One of them began to beat the drum with -his hand, making a low rhythmical sound similar to what -Wahbunou had made in the Hudson’s cabin.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_47">47</div> -<p>Jim listened intently to the Indians’ conversation, but -he couldn’t understand anything. The words sounded -like those Wahbunou had taught him, yet they were -somehow different, so that Jim couldn’t get even an idea -of what was said.</p> -<p>At last they stopped talking and began rolling in their -blankets to sleep. Two men came over to the Hudsons, -untied Pa and Jim, dragged them to separate trees and -secured them again. One Indian rolled in a blanket beside -Jim and the other beside Pa. But they offered no -blankets to them, nor to Ma Hudson now fifty feet away.</p> -<p>The next morning they gave their prisoners a small -amount of food. Ma tasted it and ate a little, but Pa and -Jim ate all the Indians gave them. After breakfast, the -women packed all the camp equipment together; the -men tied the Hudsons’ hands, set them upright on horses -and scrambled up behind them.</p> -<p>The entire party rode rapidly toward the north and -west, arriving late in the afternoon at the broad Ohio -River. The men chopped down poplar trees and began -building a raft. Jim and Pa Hudson watched in amazement -to see how quickly these Indians completed it.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_48">48</div> -<p>Then they ferried women, children and equipment -across the river. While some Indians guided the raft, others -swam their horses to the far side. When all were safely -transported, the band set up their camp for the night.</p> -<p>For several days they continued in a northwesterly direction. -On a bright cool day they stopped at noon at a -salt lick. The Hudsons realized the Indians would stay -here for a while, because the women dug a trench, filling -it with a great amount of firewood.</p> -<p>When their fires had burned to a bed of red-hot coals, -they drew water from the lick and poured it into big salt -kettles. These they placed over the hot glowing coals. -Some women kept adding firewood to keep the salt water -boiling; others began cooking over a second fire.</p> -<p>Pa, Ma and Jim were permitted to walk about the salt -lick as far as the long leash around their waists permitted. -But the Indians tied them to trees far enough apart so -they could not come close to each other. Pa always would -smile encouragingly at Ma and Jim, but he was never -permitted to touch them. Two Indians were stationed to -watch the prisoners, to prevent their escape.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_49">49</div> -<div class="img"> -<img src="images/p09.jpg" alt="uncaptioned" width="800" height="1076" /> -</div> -<div class="pb" id="Page_50">50</div> -<p>The Indians wanted to build up their supply of salt, so -the trench fires under the kettles were not allowed to go -out. Several women took turns piling on firewood during -the first night.</p> -<p>In the evening one man brought Jim’s drum to him, -gesturing for him to play it. Jim played his loudest and -best, executing ruffles and long rolls for their entertainment. -The Indians loved these sounds and his skill with -drumsticks, so kept him playing until quite late.</p> -<p>The next afternoon a new group of Indians arrived at -the lick; but they kept a long distance away from the -trench fires and did not offer to mingle with the first -band. They also set up camp and dug a long trench, making -a fire and filling their kettles with the brine. This -salt lick was evidently common ground, since neither -Indian band paid attention to the other.</p> -<p>By nightfall, the women were able to scrape the first -salt from the kettles, spread it on rough boards to dry, -and to fill the kettles with fresh brine.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_51">51</div> -<p>Again the men had Jim play his drum for them. Soon -they were swinging their bodies and clapping their hands -in time with the drum. Once by the light of campfires, -Jim thought he saw shadowy figures creeping close, as if -to listen to his playing. He felt uneasy about what they -wanted, but he continued to play even louder than before.</p> -<p>In the morning, when the women finally decided they -had enough salt for the winter, they began packing their -kettles and preparing to leave the salt lick. A few minutes -before the band was ready to go, Jim saw four stalwart -Indian men advancing rapidly toward them from -the other camp. They came near and began making a fire -in front of Jim’s group.</p> -<p>The men of Jim’s camp held a hurried consultation. -Then one of them stepped forward, raising his right arm -high above his head. Immediately the four visitors came -up to him. He motioned for them to be seated; he and -his companions sat down, too.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_52">52</div> -<p>As they talked, Jim thought they must be arguing -about some important question. After a long conversation, -one visitor rose and walked back to his camp. He -soon returned with a white man bound exactly like Pa -Hudson.</p> -<p>At a signal from the group sitting on the ground, Jim’s -guard suddenly untied his leash and led him over to the -strangers.</p> -<p>More arguing went on, but the men of Jim’s camp kept -shaking their heads. Again one visitor returned to his -camp, carrying back a handsomely painted buffalo robe -which he spread in front of the council. Jim’s band examined -the robe carefully and nodded their heads. One -of them called to the watching men. Immediately an Indian -brought Pa Hudson’s drum and sticks to the council.</p> -<p>The visitors rose from the ground, handed their white -prisoner and the buffalo robe to Jim’s band, and motioned -to Jim to pick up his drum and sticks. As soon as Jim -obeyed, one visitor picked up his leash and led him toward -the other camp.</p> -<p>Frightened now, Jim looked back at his parents. Pa -was alarmed and Ma, tearful, was holding out her arms -toward him, but both of them were still tied to the trees.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_53">53</div> -<p>When Jim reached the new camp, several men and boys -swarmed around him. From their midst, a strangely familiar -figure rushed over to Jim and took off his leash.</p> -<p>“Jim! Jim!” he cried. “Don’t you remember me? I’m -Wahbunou.”</p> -<p>Jim dropped his drum in surprise as Wahbunou gave -him a friendly thump on the shoulder. “Wahbunou!” he -gasped.</p> -<p>Wahbunou was so excited he could scarcely speak, but -he had much to tell his friend Jim. “My father and I persuaded -Chief Minnemung to trade our white prisoner for -you. We couldn’t bear to see you remain with the Shawnees. -Then we Potawatomis made a fire in front of their -camp to show we wanted to counsel with them.”</p> -<p>“Shawnees!” Jim cried out in terror, looking back toward -his father and mother. The Shawnees, however, -were now mounted and moving away from the salt lick. -Jim could still see his parents riding on separate horses -with their Indian guards, and looking hopelessly toward -the Potawatomi camp where Jim had gone.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_54">54</div> -<p>Jim turned frantically to Wahbunou. “Wahbunou——my -parents! Where are they going? Don’t let the -Shawnees take them away.”</p> -<p>Wahbunou shook his head sadly. “I tried, Jim, I really -did. I wanted to have your parents traded to us along -with you. But Chief Minnemung was interested only in -you and your drum. The drum helped me arrange the -trade, too.”</p> -<p>“The drum? What do you mean, Wahbunou?”</p> -<p>“The other night,” Wahbunou began, “we heard you -playing your drum. It was the first time my people, the -Potawatomis, had heard such playing. I knew it was not -an Indian beating that drum, because I had heard you -play like that in your cabin; so I persuaded Chief Minnemung -and my father to creep close to the Shawnee -camp to listen. It was then I saw you and your parents. -I realized you were prisoners of those Shawnees.”</p> -<p>“But my parents, Wahbunou. Why aren’t they here -with me?”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_55">55</div> -<p>Wahbunou continued patiently. “I asked Chief Minnemung -to see if he could get all of you transferred to us. -I told him and all our Potawatomi clan how good you -were to me when I hurt my shoulder. I pleaded, but Chief -Minnemung wanted only you and your drum. Why Jim, -he traded his handsomest buffalo robe for your drum.”</p> -<p>“But my parents will be unhappy separated from me,” -Jim persisted.</p> -<p>Wahbunou sighed and nodded. “I know, Jim. But I -think no harm will come to them now, because the Shawnees -are on their way to Detroit to deliver their prisoners -to the great British Hamilton. He pays the Indians well -for white prisoners.” Wahbunou picked up the drum and -sticks. “Come, Jim, I want you to meet my family because -soon we will be breaking camp.”</p> -<p>Wahbunou’s parents, brothers and sisters welcomed -Jim heartily into their group. His mother stroked Jim’s -towhead and said, “Welcome, friend. We Potawatomis -will be good to you.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_56">56</div> -<p>In a short time the Indians began packing to leave the -salt lick. When they were ready, Wahbunou said, “Jim, -you are to ride with me because we do not have extra -horses.” He led Jim over to his horse. Jim recognized it -as the one he had tied in their lean-to alongside Nellie.</p> -<p>The boys climbed up on the horse. “Now,” Wahbunou -explained, “we are going to our winter camp. It is still a -long distance away. Hang on tight, Jim, because we’ll -be riding hard today.”</p> -<p>Jim did as he was told, but with a heavy heart. Here -he was—going to some strange place with Wahbunou -and the Potawatomis, while his mother and father were -prisoners of the Shawnees. He swallowed hard, wondering -if he would ever see them again.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_57">57</div> -<div class="img"> -<img src="images/p10.jpg" alt="uncaptioned" width="800" height="379" /> -</div> -<h2 id="c4"><span class="h2line1">Chapter IV</span> -<br /><span class="h2line2">WINTER WITH THE POTAWATOMIS</span></h2> -<p>The Potawatomis rode hard for several days against a -biting northwest wind. Finally they stopped on the banks -of the <i>Au Sable</i> River, in a wide valley protected by rolling -hills. It was an ideal camp site because the hills protected -the Indians from bitter winter winds.</p> -<p>Several families had already arrived. Wahbunou told -Jim that these people were members of another clan in -his tribe. His clan, the Golden Carp, always tried to return -to this camp to hear news of their relatives and to -share in the tribe’s winter sports.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_58">58</div> -<p>The women began immediately setting up wigwams. -These they made with poles fastened to the ground in a -circle, and the tops drawn together in a cone. They covered -this framework with their <i>aquapois</i>, or reed mats -made of cattail flags, to shut out snows and winter winds.</p> -<p>The men rested a few days, then decided to go on a -short hunting trip to get fresh meat. Early in the morning -of the hunt, the men painted their faces with the vermilion, -which Jim had first seen on Wahbunou’s face.</p> -<p>“Wahbunou,” Jim said, “why are the men painting -their faces?”</p> -<p>Wahbunou turned from watching his father prepare -for the trip. “They always wear it, Jim, when they go -hunting or riding for a war raid. The day you found me -in your country, I was on a hunting trip with my father -and the other men. But I became separated from the rest. -I was trying to catch up with them when I was brushed -off my horse and broke my shoulder.”</p> -<p>“Do you usually hunt near our farm?”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_59">59</div> -<p>“Oh, no. That was the farthest south and east we had -ever ridden. But hunting wasn’t good in the places we -knew. If you had not found me I would have died, because -my people did not miss me until they returned to -camp.”</p> -<p>Jim looked puzzled. “But didn’t they hunt for you?”</p> -<p>“Oh, yes, for several days. My father said they finally -gave me up for lost, thinking I had been killed by a bear.”</p> -<p>“Then it wasn’t a trick that you happened near our -clearing?”</p> -<p>“Trick?” It was Wahbunou’s turn to look puzzled. -“What do you mean, Jim?”</p> -<p>Jim hesitated. “My father wondered if you had been -placed near our farm to spy on us, and see if we could be -easily captured.”</p> -<p>“Jim! My people would not do that. We have not -raided any cabins this year. The prisoner we traded to -the Shawnees had fired on Chief Minnemung. We had -to capture him. And anyway, Chief Minnemung wanted -his knife and gun.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_60">60</div> -<p>While the boys talked the men finished their preparations -and were ready to go. Suddenly Chief Minnemung -swung down from his horse and walked toward Jim. -“You ride with me today,” he said, putting his hand on -Jim’s shoulder.</p> -<p>Wahbunou gasped in surprise because none of the Indian -boys had been asked to go on this hunting trip. Jim -looked up at the tall, haughty chief, magnificent in his -painted buffalo robe; he started to say he didn’t care to go. -But the expression on Minnemung’s face told him this -was not an invitation but a command.</p> -<p>“Yes—yes, sir,” he managed, wishing with all his heart -he did not have to accompany the chief. “What shall I -do to get ready?”</p> -<p>Chief Minnemung looked at him for a moment. “All -right as you are. Come.” Then he turned and stalked -back to his horse.</p> -<p>“It is a great privilege, Jim,” Wahbunou whispered, -still amazed by the chief’s order.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_61">61</div> -<p>Jim got on the horse behind the chief and the party -of eighteen set out for the hunt. After they had ridden a -little way into the forest, they separated into groups of two -or three going in different directions.</p> -<p>But Chief Minnemung and Jim went alone. As they -rode along Jim noticed that the chief was carrying a rifle -like his father’s, and wearing a long knife also like his father’s -in a wampum belt which girded his beautiful robe.</p> -<p>Jim pointed to the rifle. “You have a gun like my father’s.”</p> -<p>Chief Minnemung grinned a hideous grin through his -streaked vermilion paint. “<i>Shemolsea</i>,” he grunted. -Then he patted the big knife and again said, “<i>Shemolsea</i>.”</p> -<p>Suddenly Chief Minnemung reined in his horse. Then -he tried to sight his rifle, but could not do it on the horse, -so slid quietly to the ground. Once again he tried to sight -the rifle. Jim looked to see what the chief’s quarry was. -In the distance he saw a black bear, but it was too far -away to shoot.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_62">62</div> -<p>The Indian kept fumbling with the rifle and suddenly -the sound of a shot broke the stillness of the forest. Chief -Minnemung shouted in triumph and dropped the gun. -He had fired the rifle. But his triumph was short-lived, -for his shout was answered by an unearthly moan. He -had wounded the bear which was now charging toward -him. The old chief stood frozen in his tracks when he -realized the rifle shot had not killed the bear.</p> -<p>Jim slid off the horse, grabbed the rifle from the -ground, reloaded it and waited. The bear was coming -nearer and Jim knew he must not miss his aim. The -wounded animal would kill them, if he did not kill it -first.</p> -<p>When the bear was only a few feet away, Jim fired. -This time the aim was deadly accurate, piercing the bear -between the eyes. It fell in its tracks.</p> -<p>Chief Minnemung waited a few moments, then turned -to Jim. “White boy, Jim, you have saved Chief Minnemung’s -life. I will not forget this moment. Minnemung -not know how to use <i>Shemolsea</i> gun.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_63">63</div> -<div class="img"> -<img src="images/p11.jpg" alt="uncaptioned" width="800" height="1071" /> -</div> -<div class="pb" id="Page_64">64</div> -<p>The old chief was quite shaken and nervous, but with -Jim’s help, he managed to truss the bear and get it back -to camp. When the women and children saw Jim and -Chief Minnemung returning with the big bear, they ran -out to meet them, yelling in delight.</p> -<p>“Bear meat!” Wahbunou cried. “Now we’ll have a -feast. Chief Minnemung got a bear with <i>Shemolsea</i> -gun.”</p> -<p>The chief was grinning in delight, but never a word -did he say about Jim’s shooting the bear. He took all the -credit for the kill and did not so much as glance at Jim. -Jim would have liked to tell Wahbunou he had killed the -bear, but he was afraid Chief Minnemung would be angry, -so he said nothing.</p> -<p>Late in the day the other men returned with squirrels -and wild turkeys, but no large game. For several days the -camp feasted on bear meat, while all the Indians praised -their chief for bringing home such a prize. The chief still -kept silent about Jim.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_65">65</div> -<p>Soon winter came to the camp and the ground was covered -with snow. Then the children had lots of fun. Wahbunou -showed Jim how to make a sled, using buffalo ribs -for the runners and hides for the seat. Jim found it was -a fine sled and had fun coasting down the hills with the -other children.</p> -<p>One morning when the snow was packed very hard, -Wahbunou said, “Come on, Jim, we’re going to play -Snow Snake.”</p> -<p>“Snow Snake? What kind of game is that?”</p> -<p>“We play it by teams with snow-snake poles,” Wahbunou -explained. He took Jim to a long level playground -in the valley where the other children had gathered. -They chose sides, having six to a team. Then they drew -lots to see who would throw the first pole. Wahbunou -drew the first throw.</p> -<p>He picked up the hickory pole, the ends of which were -carved like the head of a snake. He held it high and -threw it with all his strength. The pole shot through the -air for quite a distance and fell to the ground far from -him. An older boy and girl served as scorekeepers and -measured the length of its flight.</p> -<p>“Now, Jim,” Wahbunou urged, “do your best.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_66">66</div> -<p>Jim stepped forward and tried to throw the pole as far -as Wahbunou had, but it fell far short. Jim sighed. “I’m -no good at this game.”</p> -<p>“You’ll soon learn, Jim,” comforted Wahbunou.</p> -<p>Jim did learn to throw the snow-snake pole as well as -the other boys. Sometimes Chief Minnemung walked out -to watch the children; he always smiled when Jim threw -it farther than the others. Quite often during the winter -the chief called Jim to his Wigwam, to play Pa Hudson’s -drum for him and sometimes for all the Indians.</p> -<p>Jim grew tall during the winter, had plenty of food and -was snug and warm in the wigwam. He would have been -happy with the Potawatomis if only his parents had been -with him. But often at night he could not sleep, because -he kept seeing his parents riding sadly away with the -Shawnees.</p> -<p>After a long, cold winter, spring came again to the valley. -One fine day Wahbunou told Jim he had heard the -men say they would be moving out of winter camp the -next morning.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_67">67</div> -<p>“But tonight, Jim,” Wahbunou went on, “we shall -watch the dance of the women. This dance celebrates the -beginning of our summer wanderings. Then we’ll break -up into small bands again and we won’t see the rest of -our clan until next winter.”</p> -<p>Jim looked doubtful. “The dance of the women, Wahbunou? -What is that?”</p> -<p>“Wait and see, Jim. Wait and see.”</p> -<p>When the women came out of their wigwams in their -ceremonial dresses, Jim scarcely recognized any of them. -They had greased their hair until it shone in the glow of -the campfires, painted their faces with vermilion and put -on long white chemises, over which they had strung all -the wampum necklaces they possessed.</p> -<p>At their appearance four or five young men began singing -and beating the dance rhythm on their Indian -drums; often they shook the <i>si si quoi</i>, a sort of gourd -containing dry seeds. The women danced in graceful -rhythm, not missing a single step.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_68">68</div> -<p>Jim thought the dancing beautiful, but he didn’t enjoy -it as much as the Indians, because he grew very sleepy -long before the dance was over. He didn’t know it would -last well into the night.</p> -<p>The next morning, however, the camp was awake early -with everyone getting ready to move. The women packed -wigwam poles, cattail mats, kettles, winter buffalo robes -and the rest of the camping equipment. Wahbunou’s -mother packed Jim’s drum carefully among her belongings, -so that he wouldn’t have to carry it on the horse.</p> -<p>All the Indians put on their summer clothes, one-piece -garments of red or blue cloth. Wahbunou gave Jim one -of his blue cloth shirts, just like the one he had been wearing -when the Hudsons found him. Then everyone -mounted their horses. Once again Jim rode with Wahbunou.</p> -<p>Chief Minnemung started northward with his group. -Jim was to learn they would be constantly on the move -during the spring and summer, as the Potawatomis had -no lands of their own to cultivate. Frenchmen and some -neighboring Indian tribes called them squatters because -of their habit of moving in on land claimed by both the -French and Indians.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_69">69</div> -<p>As they moved back and forth across the Illinois country -searching for game, wild berries and edible roots and -herbs, spring gave way to summer. Now the prairie grass -was as high as Jim’s head and the woods dense with foliage.</p> -<p>One morning while Jim was helping Wahbunou’s -mother skin some squirrels, Wahbunou wandered away -on some mission of his own. Wahbunou didn’t like to -work; he specially didn’t want to skin squirrels, so he always -managed to get away when his mother needed him. -He was gone only a few minutes, however, then came -rushing back. “Jim. Jim, Chief Minnemung wants to -see you at once.”</p> -<p>Jim put down a squirrel and looked up. “Chief Minnemung? -Where is he? I wonder what he wants.”</p> -<p>Wahbunou pointed to a group of men under a tree. -“He’s over there. See? Talking with my father and some -of the other men.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_70">70</div> -<p>Jim turned to Wahbunou’s mother. “I’ll be back soon. -Chief Minnemung wants to speak to me.” Then he -walked over toward the group of men.</p> -<p>At his approach the men nodded and walked away -from their chief. Minnemung smiled at Jim and motioned -for him to sit down beside him.</p> -<p>“Jim,” he said, laying his hand on the boy’s arm, “I -have been watching you all winter and spring. Now I -have come to a great decision.”</p> -<p>Jim waited, wondering what the old man would say -next.</p> -<p>Chief Minnemung leaned toward the boy, his brown -eyes stern and serious. “I have decided to adopt you as -my own son.”</p> -<p>“Adopt me!” Jim gasped, a chill of fear passing over -him.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_71">71</div> -<p>The old chief continued as though Jim had not spoken. -“I lost my only son two years ago with a fever. That fever -took four of our most promising young men. I have been -lonely, very lonely in my wigwam. But I have watched -you all during the time you have been with us. I remember -also that you saved my life on that hunting trip when -I did not know how to use the rifle of the <i>Shemolsea</i>.”</p> -<p>Chief Minnemung did not take his eyes from the trembling -boy. “But the greatest test of all you passed easily. -You did not belittle me in front of my clan by telling -them that you killed the black bear.”</p> -<p>Jim was startled. He hadn’t realized that Minnemung -would have lost the esteem of his clan if the Indians discovered -Jim had really killed the bear.</p> -<p>“So you see,” Chief Minnemung continued, “you have -proved yourself worthy of adoption into the Potawatomi -tribe as my son.”</p> -<p>“Adoption,” Jim murmured. It was the last gift he -wanted, because it would mean he would be forever cut -off from his own people. “But sir—” he began.</p> -<p>“We shall have the adoption ceremonies when the clans -gather early in the fall,” the chief said. “I just wanted to -tell you of this honor which awaits you.” Chief Minnemung -nodded his head in dismissal. “That is all.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_72">72</div> -<p>Jim stumbled back; Wahbunou and his mother were -still working with the squirrel skins.</p> -<p>“What’s the matter, Jim?” Wahbunou asked, when he -caught sight of Jim’s stricken face. “Was Chief Minnemung -angry with you? And for what?”</p> -<p>Jim shook his head. “No, he wasn’t angry. He wanted -to tell me that he is going to adopt me as his son in -the fall.”</p> -<p>Wahbunou dropped the skin he was cleaning. “Chief -Minnemung is going to adopt you!” Wahbunou clapped -Jim on the back. “Why, that means you’ll be the son of -a chief.”</p> -<p>Jim hung his head and said in a low voice, “Wahbunou, -I don’t want to be adopted by Chief Minnemung. And -I don’t want to be a member of your tribe.”</p> -<p>Wahbunou stared at Jim, thinking he had not heard -him correctly. “You don’t want to be Chief Minnemung’s -son?”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_73">73</div> -<p>Now Jim’s blue eyes were misty with tears. “No, Wahbunou. -You and your people have been very kind to me, -but I want my own people. I hope to find my father and -mother. Don’t you remember that you didn’t want to live -with us?”</p> -<p>Wahbunou nodded slowly. “But, Jim, you don’t know -where your father and mother are. Nor do I. I only know -they were prisoners of the Shawnees. And they live far -to the east. We Potawatomis do not mingle with them.”</p> -<p>Jim’s lips trembled as he said, “If they’re still alive, I’ll -find them some day, Wahbunou. I wouldn’t be happy -being a real Potawatomi.”</p> -<p>Wahbunou sighed and was silent for a while. Finally -he said, “Jim, I do understand that you want to be with -your own people. Believe me. But Chief Minnemung -has spoken. His word is law with us. There is nothing -that my father or I can do to prevent your adoption.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_74">74</div> -<div class="img"> -<img src="images/p12.jpg" alt="uncaptioned" width="789" height="365" /> -</div> -<h2 id="c5"><span class="h2line1">Chapter V</span> -<br /><span class="h2line2">THE LONG-KNIVES</span></h2> -<p>Several days later Chief Minnemung sent word around -that everyone was to prepare for the annual trading trip -to Cahokia. Soon the women were busy sorting the fur -pelts they had accumulated during the winter and spring, -and tying them in separate bundles according to kind. -When all were sorted, Jim was surprised to see how many -bundles there were.</p> -<p>“This Cahokia, Wahbunou? What is it?” Jim asked. -He and Wahbunou were mounted on the horse ready to -start on the journey.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_75">75</div> -<p>Wahbunou smiled. “Cahokia is a French village a long -way from here. We go there every year about this time. -The French have a trading post and we’ll trade our furs -for many supplies which we need.”</p> -<p>“What supplies, Wahbunou?”</p> -<p>“I’m not sure what we’ll get this trip, but sometimes -we get food or blankets. I think Chief Minnemung may -want to trade for guns and some powder. The French -are our friends; we always stay a while in their village. -Then we’ll move on for the annual council of our tribe.”</p> -<p>A shadow crossed Jim’s face at mention of the council, -because Minnemung had told him the adoption ceremonies -would take place there. Suddenly a plan of escape -from the Potawatomis occurred to him. Perhaps he -might be able to join the French while trading was going -on; they might even help him find his parents. But he -said nothing to Wahbunou.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_76">76</div> -<p>The Potawatomis had been wandering southeast, but -now they turned about and began riding in a westerly direction, -bearing a little to the north. It was so warm they -didn’t try to cover many miles in a day. Sometimes they -stayed several days in their overnight camps. This was -the season for ripe berries, so the Indians stopped often to -feast on wild raspberries or dewberries.</p> -<p>One afternoon they happened upon a large berry patch -bordering a heavy forest. Everyone ate his fill of berries -while the women and children gathered some in their -kettles and gourds to take with them. Wahbunou told -Jim they would be leaving the forests now and riding -through wide meadows of prairie grass. There would not -be another opportunity to pick berries this summer.</p> -<p>The two boys tethered their horse, scrambling farther -and farther into the brambles away from the rest of the -Indians and seeking larger and larger berries. All at once -Jim looked back and saw the Potawatomis riding away -without them.</p> -<p>“Wahbunou!” he cried. “Look! Minnemung and the -rest are leaving.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_77">77</div> -<p>Wahbunou glanced toward the disappearing group. -“In a minute, Jim. We can catch them easily. Let’s get -just a few more berries.” He pointed to a heavily laden -bush nearby. “Let’s get those, then we’ll go.”</p> -<p>Jim glanced uneasily at the band of Indians now almost -out of sight in the tall prairie grass. He didn’t want to be -left in this trackless ocean of grass. “We’d better go, Wahbunou.”</p> -<p>Wahbunou tossed his head and laughed. “I can catch -them easily, Jim. My horse isn’t far away and he’s faster -than any save Chief Minnemung’s.” Then he turned -again to the berries. The boys had been stuffing themselves -with the delicious fruit for perhaps ten minutes, -when Wahbunou’s horse suddenly began pawing the -ground. Wahbunou cocked his head to one side and listened.</p> -<p>“I hear the sound of many feet, Jim. I think it’s the -feet of many men.” Now it was Wahbunou’s turn to be -alarmed.</p> -<p>Jim frowned. “I don’t hear anything, Wahbunou. -Let’s be on our way.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_78">78</div> -<p>“You wait,” cautioned Wahbunou, seizing his horse’s -bridle. “I don’t hear any horses’ hoofs, just the sound of -men.” He led his horse to the edge of the berry patch, -where he could see the broad expanse of prairie. The -grass was almost as tall as Jim’s head, it rippled rhythmically -in the wind, making it look like waves of the ocean. -It had a sort of singing sound which Jim had never heard -before.</p> -<p>“I hear only a sort of singing,” Jim said. “I think it’s -the wind in this grass.”</p> -<p>Wahbunou put his finger to his lips. “Shh, Jim! -They’re coming.” Then he signaled to his horse to lie -down at the edge of the grass.</p> -<p>The horse obeyed immediately and none too soon -either. The next moment the boys saw a band of white -men marching out of the forest. And they kept coming, -more men than Wahbunou could count. Just before they -plunged into the thick prairie grass the boys could see they -had long rifles and wore sparkling long knives in their -belts. The sun shining on the knives made them visible -even at this distance.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_79">79</div> -<p>“<i>Shemolsea!</i>” gasped Wahbunou, dropping to his -knees.</p> -<p>Jim also dropped down into the grass and turned to -Wahbunou. “Wahbunou,” he whispered, “what do you -mean by <i>Shemolsea</i>? I remember you said that word the -day my father found you in the woods. And Chief Minnemung -said his rifle was <i>Shemolsea</i>.”</p> -<p>Wahbunou whispered, “<i>Shemolsea</i>—Long-Knife. -Men who carry long knives. You know your father had -one. He is <i>Shemolsea</i>.”</p> -<p>“Oh! You mean all of us Kentucky settlers are Long-Knives?” -Jim started to stand up, but Wahbunou pulled -him down. “Do you want them to kill you, Jim?” he -whispered in terror.</p> -<p>“Why, they wouldn’t kill us. Maybe I might know -some of them.” Jim raised up to take another look at the -men. Their column had turned southwest and Jim could -no longer see their faces. There were so many men Jim -was afraid to call out to them. “I wonder who they are -and where they’re going,” he muttered, half to himself.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_80">80</div> -<p>Wahbunou was whispering, “As soon as they’ve gone, -we’ll have to ride fast and tell Chief Minnemung about -the many, many Long-Knives we’ve seen.”</p> -<p>“I think I’ll go and join them,” Jim cried, scrambling -up from the tall grass.</p> -<p>Wahbunou tripped him and he fell headlong. “No, -Jim. That you cannot do. Chief Minnemung would kill -me if anything happened to you. You must ride back -with me.”</p> -<p>Wahbunou looked so frightened that Jim hesitated. He -wouldn’t want Wahbunou punished by Chief Minnemung; -nor would he want those Long-Knives, whoever -they were, to attack the little Potawatomi band. For -a few minutes he was silent. Then he said, “Wahbunou, -I’ll go back with you, if you’ll promise not to tell -anyone we saw these Long-Knives. Promise?”</p> -<p>“But maybe they’ll attack us,” Wahbunou replied -doubtfully.</p> -<p>“Aw, those men aren’t marching after a small band of -Indians,” Jim replied. “Is there any town near here?”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_81">81</div> -<p>“Kaskaskia is over that way.” Wahbunou pointed in -the general direction the column of men had taken. “It’s -another French settlement. We do not go through it on -the way to Cahokia. Cahokia is north.”</p> -<p>Jim shook his head. He still wondered where those -Long-Knives were going—his Long-Knives. Why, they -were his people! Suddenly he thought of another plan of -escape, this time without involving Wahbunou. Here -was his real chance. He turned to tell the Indian boy, -but Wahbunou was on his feet signaling to his horse.</p> -<p>“Come, Jim. The Long-Knives have gone. I think -we can ride now.” Wahbunou mounted his horse and -Jim climbed on behind him.</p> -<p>As they rode through the prairie grass away from the -column of Long-Knives, Jim said, “Wahbunou, I can’t -go through with it. I can’t let Chief Minnemung adopt -me into the Potawatomi tribe. My countrymen are close -at hand. I can join these white Long-Knives and perhaps -they will know something of my father and mother.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_82">82</div> -<p>Wahbunou trembled as he cried out, “Jim! You must -not leave me. You must go back to Chief Minnemung. -He will kill me if I return without you.”</p> -<p>Jim became thoughtful; then he said, “Wahbunou, it -wouldn’t be your fault if I left the camp tonight.”</p> -<p>Wahbunou gulped. “You wouldn’t dare do that, Jim.”</p> -<p>Jim nodded. “Wouldn’t I? You did. You stole away -from us and went back to your people.”</p> -<p>The Indian boy urged his horse to a faster pace. “Yes, -Jim, I did. My people were going to a place I knew and I -had a horse. You wouldn’t take my horse?”</p> -<p>“No, Wahbunou, I wouldn’t steal your horse. But you -must promise not to tell anyone about seeing the Long-Knives. -I’ll steal away at night. I’ll find those men.”</p> -<p>“But, Jim, you’d get lost in the dark. And Chief Minnemung -would hear you. Indians have sharp ears.”</p> -<p>“I’ll have the stars to guide me. My father taught me -to tell direction by the stars. The Long-Knives certainly -won’t march all night. I’ll find them, never fear.” Jim -clutched Wahbunou more firmly. “Now promise me—no -word about the Long-Knives.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_83">83</div> -<p>Wahbunou gulped and finally said, “It shall be as you -say. Wahbunou will say no word.”</p> -<p>Thus the two boys made a solemn pact riding back to -the Potawatomi band.</p> -<p>When they finally arrived, the Indians had pitched -camp in a small thicket adjoining the prairie. It was almost -dark and the women had supper ready. Strangely -enough no one had missed them, so the boys didn’t have -to explain their absence. Evidently the Indians had -neither heard nor seen the marching column of men, because -they seemed as carefree as usual.</p> -<p>After supper, as the Indians sat around the campfire, -Chief Minnemung suddenly took a notion to have Jim -play his drum. “Jim,” he said, “get your drum and play -for us.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_84">84</div> -<p>Nothing could have pleased Jim more. If his Long-Knives -were within hearing distance and heard the roll -of the drum, they might investigate the sound. He didn’t -want to see his Indian friends hurt, but he did wish the -Long-Knives would appear and take him with them. He -rose quickly. “Yes, Chief Minnemung, I’ll be glad to -play for you.”</p> -<p>Wahbunou’s mother had to unpack the drum from her -housekeeping belongings, but she did not protest because -Chief Minnemung had ordered Jim to play.</p> -<p>Jim beat the drum with all his might, executing some -long rolls and difficult ruffles. Now and then he would -toss a drumstick into the air and catch it again without -missing a beat. At this the Indians grinned in glee at his -skill.</p> -<p>Jim played until he was exhausted, all the while hoping -to see the Long-Knives coming to the camp. But no one -came, and nothing broke the stillness of the summer -night save the beating of his drum.</p> -<p>At last Chief Minnemung signaled for him to stop playing. -Immediately all the Indians lay down to sleep. -Wahbunou’s mother forgot to pack Jim’s drum away, so -he put it carefully down on the ground between him and -Wahbunou. Then he lay down and pretended to sleep.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_85">85</div> -<p>He listened for a long time until he felt sure everyone -was asleep; then he took his drum and began to crawl -slowly from his place on the ground. But Wahbunou -was not asleep. At Jim’s first move he whispered, “Jim, -are you leaving?”</p> -<p>Jim turned and patted Wahbunou’s shoulder. “Shh! -Yes. Thanks, Wahbunou. I’ll never forget you.”</p> -<p>Wahbunou sighed but did not reply, so Jim felt sure his -secret was safe with his Indian friend. Wahbunou would -not fail him.</p> -<p>He continued to inch along the ground with the drum, -stopping every few feet to see if any of the other Indians -had awakened; but save for Wahbunou, the camp was -silent.</p> -<p>When he was certain he was far enough away not to be -seen, Jim stood up; he fastened his drum and drumsticks -to the belt encircling his long blue shirt, and looked at the -sky. It was a beautiful summer night and the sky was -filled with stars.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_86">86</div> -<p>He studied them for a few minutes until he located the -North Star and the Big Dipper. Then he began walking -southwest, the way the Long-Knives had marched in the -afternoon. Except for twinkling stars, the night was very -black, because there was no moon.</p> -<p>Jim trudged along and was soon beyond the little -thicket, which broke the vast prairie. All through the -long night, he made his way through the high prairie -grass, hearing no sound save the singing of the wind.</p> -<p>When morning finally came, he found himself in the -midst of a trackless ocean of grass, with no sign of any -Long-Knives, no telltale path through the grass or sign of -the Indians’ camp. There was only singing, swaying -prairie grass, stretching toward the horizon in all directions.</p> -<p>Jim sighed, but walked steadily on, now and then -scaring up a flock of prairie chickens which rose squawking -into the air. Taking his bearings from the sun now, -he knew he was going west.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_87">87</div> -<p>The sun grew unbearably hot, making Jim very thirsty, -but there was no water anywhere. Now and then he -would look back to see if the Indians could be pursuing -him. But he needn’t have worried. His slight figure left -no trail through the prairie grass.</p> -<p>As the day wore on he became thirstier, and very hungry. -He began to wonder if he had made a mistake to -leave the Indians and try to find a band of strange men in -this trackless country. Late in the afternoon he thought -he saw a line of trees in the distance. He couldn’t be sure, -because this steaming prairie grass played tricks with his -eyes and he was afraid he saw a mirage. If he could only -make it to those trees, he would lie down in the shade and -rest a bit.</p> -<p>The trees proved to be real enough, and when Jim -reached them he fell into their cool shade and fell asleep.</p> -<p>He was awakened after dawn by someone prodding -his foot and a rough voice saying, “Get up, boy. Who are -you? Where did you come from?”</p> -<p>Jim opened his eyes and saw two men standing over -him. They were dressed in dirty, torn buckskins, with -long knives hanging to their belts. The taller man was -prodding him with a rifle.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_88">88</div> -<p>Jim sprang up, his eyes shining. “Oh, you’re the -<i>Shemolsea</i>—the Long-Knives.”</p> -<p>“Never mind who we are,” the man said crossly. -“Who are you in that Indian outfit? What are you doing -here?”</p> -<p>“I’m Jim Hudson. I escaped from the Indians last -night and I’ve been trying to find you all day.”</p> -<p>“A likely story,” muttered the shorter man. “Probably -you’re some spy sent out by the Indians.”</p> -<p>Jim shook his head. “No, sir. I saw a big band of -Long-Knives yesterday and I’ve been trying to find -them.”</p> -<p>“Let’s take him to Colonel Clark,” the shorter man -suggested.</p> -<p>Jim’s eyes sparkled. “Clark, did you say? George -Rogers Clark? Is he red-haired?”</p> -<p>The tall soldier spoke again. “Say, boy, you know -too much. Come on, get going.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_89">89</div> -<p>As they walked single file through the woods, they -made Jim walk between them. After stumbling over -fallen trees and brambles for about a mile, they came -upon a group of ragged men sitting and standing in -the dense shade along a river.</p> -<p>“Colonel Clark, sir,” began the tall soldier, “we’ve -found a white boy; he says he was a prisoner of the Indians. -But he knows too much. Must be some trick here.”</p> -<p>A ragged, commanding figure with red hair turned -from the men and walked over to Jim. His stern, hazel -eyes seemed to penetrate Jim’s whole body as he said, -“Well, lad, who are you? What are you doing here?”</p> -<p>Jim was so excited he could scarcely talk. “Colonel -Clark, I’m Jim Hudson. I don’t suppose you remember -me, sir, but I remember your red hair. I met you late last -year with my father at Coon Hollow. We had been hunting -and had bagged a deer. You advised my father to go -to Harrodsburg until the Indian scare was over.” Jim -looked hopefully at the colonel.</p> -<p>Colonel Clark seemed to be turning something over in -his mind. Finally he smiled. “I remember. But how do -you happen to be out here in the Illinois country?”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_90">90</div> -<p>Then Jim told the long story of how he and Pa and -Ma had been captured by the Shawnees on the way to -Harrodsburg; how later he had been traded to the -Potawatomis, with whom he had spent the winter. When -he was telling of seeing the column of Long-Knives, -Colonel Clark interrupted him.</p> -<p>“Just a minute, boy. Did the Indians with you see us?”</p> -<p>Jim shook his head. “No, sir, only Wahbunou. We -had stayed behind the rest to eat more berries. Wahbunou -promised me he would not tell he had seen the -Long-Knives.”</p> -<p>Colonel Clark looked puzzled. “That’s hard to believe, -Jim. I wouldn’t trust an Indian not to warn his people of -an army of white men near them.”</p> -<p>The tall soldier scowled, as did several others. But no -one spoke a word.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_91">91</div> -<p>“But, sir,” Jim replied, “we saved Wahbunou’s life, so -he promised not to tell about the Long-Knives. He knew -of my plan to escape.” Jim explained how the Hudsons -found Wahbunou near their clearing and of Chief Minnemung’s -decision to adopt Jim. “That’s why I ran away, -sir. I didn’t want to be a Potawatomi. I hope to find my -parents, but I don’t know if they’re alive.”</p> -<p>George Rogers Clark nodded. “I trust they are, Jim, -and I can’t blame you for not wanting to be a Potawatomi. -For the present you’ll go with us and be a part of -my volunteer army. We’re crossing the river tonight -and marching on Kaskaskia.”</p> -<p>“I see you have a drum. Perhaps we’ll need a drummer -before this night is over.” He turned and motioned -to the tall soldier. “This is Simon Kenton, Jim. You are -to go with him and do whatever he says.”</p> -<p>“Yes, sir.”</p> -<p>Simon Kenton inclined his head toward the river bank. -“Come on, Jim. We’ll have a look at Kaskaskia from -this side of the river. Have a care though. We don’t want -any of those Frenchmen over there to see us.”</p> -<p>As Jim and Kenton approached the river’s edge, Kenton -dropped to the ground. “We have to crawl now, Jim, -so’s we can see without being seen.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_92">92</div> -<p>At the edge of the bank they could see the little town of -Kaskaskia. It lay in a kind of amphitheatre of woods and -bluffs. They could also see the fort with a stockade built -around it, the steeple of a church, and some thatched -roofs and stone houses shining in the afternoon sun.</p> -<p>“Gee, it’s bigger than the settlements I’ve seen in Virginia!” -Jim exclaimed.</p> -<p>“Yep,” Kenton replied. “This is one of the oldest and -best of the French villages. I’ve heard it called the Paris of -the West. See that British flag flying above the fort? Tomorrow, -God willing, it’ll be flying the American flag.</p> -<p>“You see, Jim, Colonel Clark has to take this country -from the British to make our Kentucky settlers safe -from Indian attack. Commander Hamilton at Detroit -has been stirring up the Indians against our people.”</p> -<p>“Yes, sir, I know. I think that’s how my parents and I -happened to be captured.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_93">93</div> -<p>For a while they watched the town. Nothing unusual -was going on, so Simon Kenton told Jim he thought no -one there suspected the presence of Clark and his army -directly across the river. Then they crawled back to the -main group of soldiers.</p> -<p>Jim didn’t think the men in this motley, exhausted -army could capture a town during the night. Several of -them had taken off their shoes and were nursing their -painful, swollen feet. They were suffering from scald -foot, a wilderness malady brought on by dampness, heat -and too much marching.</p> -<p>Jim wondered if they could put on their shoes when it -came time to cross the river. All of them were hungry besides, -as they had eaten nothing but berries for many days. -Could such an army capture a well-fed town like Kaskaskia?</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_94">94</div> -<div class="img"> -<img src="images/p13.jpg" alt="uncaptioned" width="800" height="433" /> -</div> -<h2 id="c6"><span class="h2line1">Chapter VI</span> -<br /><span class="h2line2">ON TO KASKASKIA</span></h2> -<p>When night fell, Colonel Clark ordered his men to -march. Led by two soldiers who had been scouting the -woods all afternoon, they followed the bank of the -Kaskaskia River until they came to a farmhouse. Here -several boats were moored at the river bank. Clark -ordered some of his men to surround the house and -others to seize the family living in it.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_95">95</div> -<p>A very frightened Frenchman, his wife and their several -children came out of the house, holding their hands -high in the air. The soldiers brought the father to Colonel -Clark who began questioning him about the town -of Kaskaskia.</p> -<p>The man said the town had been expecting an attack -from the direction of the Mississippi River. This alarm -had died down, he thought, because now there was no -extra militia at Kaskaskia. He also said most of the Indians -loitering there had left and gone to Cahokia.</p> -<p>Jim shivered at the mention of Cahokia and wondered -if Chief Minnemung and his Potawatomis had arrived -there, or if they were still searching for him.</p> -<p>When Clark got the information that the town was -quiet, he permitted the French family to return to their -home, and ordered his men to start ferrying the army -across the river. Since he had well over a hundred men, -they must make many trips back and forth in the few -boats on the river bank. Jim and Simon Kenton were to -go with the first group.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_96">96</div> -<p>As Jim climbed into one boat, he stumbled over a boy -about his own age who was trembling and cowering in -the bottom. Kenton, just behind Jim, pointed his rifle at -the boy. “Who are you?” he asked gruffly. “What are -you doing here?”</p> -<p>The frightened boy did not reply but stared up at the -rifle.</p> -<p>“Come, boy,” Kenton repeated, “what are you doing -here?”</p> -<p>The boy scrambled to his feet and stammered, “I——I -was just going home. I came from Kaskaskia this -morning in this boat. I was hunting beeswax for Father -Gibault. He needs more beeswax for the church candles. -When I saw all your men I hid here. I hoped you would -go away so I could go home.”</p> -<p>Kenton sneered. “A likely story. You’ve been spying -for de Rochblave no doubt.”</p> -<p>“Oh, no, sir. I only know the commandant by sight, -sir. I tell you true, I was hunting beeswax. And I found a -bee tree, too.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_97">97</div> -<p>“Well, you’ll go back as our prisoner. Sit down in the -boat.” Simon Kenton turned to Jim. “Sit beside him, -Jim, and keep your eye on him. Don’t let him get away.”</p> -<p>“Yes, sir,” Jim replied, making room for the boy.</p> -<p>The boat was now filled and the men began rowing -across the river toward Kaskaskia. Jim could feel the -boy trembling beside him. He whispered, “Don’t be -afraid. Colonel Clark will see that no harm comes to you. -What’s your name? I’m Jim Hudson.”</p> -<p>“Willie——Willie Watson,” the boy replied.</p> -<p>As soon as all soldiers were ferried across the river and -assembled in their respective companies, Colonel Clark -stepped out in front of them. It was too dark to see this -erect, commanding man, but there was no mistaking the -stern authority in his voice.</p> -<p>“Men,” he said, “our first objective is to take this town. -By seizing Kaskaskia, we’ll be protecting our countrymen -in the western country. You all know the British have -been inciting the Indians to war against our settlers. By -controlling this French settlement, we’ll cut off all supplies -from New Orleans and the west to Hamilton at -Detroit, so tonight it’s win or lose everything. Now, -I’ll make three divisions of these companies. Captain -Bowman.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_98">98</div> -<p>“Yes, sir,” and Captain Bowman stepped forward.</p> -<p>“You are to command one division. Take your men to -the far quarter of the town. Captain Helm, command the -second, and take your men to the other end of town. I’ll -lead the third division.”</p> -<p>The men assembled quickly according to orders. -Jim and Willie were assigned to Captain Bowman’s division.</p> -<p>“Kenton,” Colonel Clark continued, “you’re to go -with me. Now, men, if we take the fort and capture de -Rochblave without resistance, you’ll hear three shots. -The shots will be my signal of victory. Then all of you -are to yell and shout as loudly as you can. And Jim,” -Colonel Clark peered into the darkness, “where’s Jim -Hudson?”</p> -<p>“Here, sir.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_99">99</div> -<p>“When the men start yelling, you beat your drum as -hard as possible. Run through the town from one end to -the other beating it. That will help make the French -think we have a large army. Keep beating it. Do you -hear?”</p> -<p>“Yes, sir.”</p> -<p>“If any of you men speak French, step forward.”</p> -<p>Several soldiers stepped forward from the ranks.</p> -<p>Willie whispered to Jim, “I can speak French, too.”</p> -<p>“Step forward then,” Jim urged, so Willie stepped out -with the others.</p> -<p>“After I give the signal,” Clark continued, “you are to -run through the streets telling the people in French that -the Long-Knives have taken Kaskaskia. And tell them -to stay inside their homes. If they venture outside they -will be shot.” Clark’s voice became sterner than before. -“Now then, not one of you is to talk to any of the inhabitants. -I want no conversation with them. Is that -clear?”</p> -<p>“Yes, sir,” the men answered in chorus.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_100">100</div> -<p>Immediately Colonel Clark set out, leading his own -division through dark, silent streets toward the fort. The -two captains started with their men for the assigned positions. -For Jim and Willie it was an eerie experience to -march through the dark streets, then wait—wait in silence -for the hoped-for signal.</p> -<p>After what seemed an endless time to the boys, three -rifle shots rang out from the fort. These meant that -Colonel Clark and his men had captured Commandant -Philip de Rochblave and his fort without any resistance.</p> -<p>Then what yelling and screaming went up in all parts -of the town. Those men speaking French tried to out-yell -other Long-Knives shouting Clark’s orders in English. -As Willie ran through the streets shouting his orders, -Jim kept beside him, beating his drum with all his -might.</p> -<p>Jim thought he’d better keep track of Willie so he -wouldn’t escape. Willie, however, showed no signs of -wanting to leave the Long-Knives, but kept shouting -Clark’s orders over and over. They kept up this din all -night and were so excited they never thought of sleep.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_101">101</div> -<div class="img"> -<img src="images/p14.jpg" alt="uncaptioned" width="800" height="1032" /> -</div> -<div class="pb" id="Page_102">102</div> -<p>The next morning the streets were deserted save for -Clark’s troops now doing guard duty in various parts of -town. Jim and Willie were still together and Jim was surprised -to see what a beautiful place Kaskaskia was.</p> -<p>In the center of town was a large grass-covered square, -with narrow streets leading out from it. From here Jim -saw the American flag was indeed flying from the old fort. -There were a few stone houses here and there, but most -of them were wooden with pointed, thatched roofs and -chimneys at either end.</p> -<p>While Jim was admiring the town, someone called, -“Come on, boys. Breakfast is ready.”</p> -<p>Jim and Willie didn’t need to be called the second time. -They dashed to join the men just sitting down to breakfast; -it had been prepared by spies Colonel Clark had sent -into town ahead of his troops.</p> -<p>Meantime the terror-stricken residents of Kaskaskia -remained indoors, not knowing what was to become of -them. Father Pierre Gibault asked Colonel Clark if the -people could assemble in the church to pray. They feared -they were to be separated and taken away by Clark’s -soldiers. Clark granted Father Gibault’s request and the -people walked solemnly into the church.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_103">103</div> -<p>Some time later Colonel Clark spoke to them, telling -them not to be afraid. He said the king of France had -joined the Americans against the British and now they -could all work together. He asked only that the residents -of Kaskaskia swear allegiance to the Long-Knives, who -represented the Continental Congress and Virginia.</p> -<p>Immediately the gloom and fear of the people melted -away. They rang the old church bell in jubilation, giving -thanks for their freedom, weeping and laughing for joy.</p> -<p>No one was more astounded at this news than little -Willie Watson. He clapped his hands and turned handsprings -down the street. He had expected to be thrown -into chains and taken far away. Now he was as free as -Jim. He looked at his friend. “Colonel Clark is a wonderful -man,” he said, his dark eyes shining.</p> -<p>Jim nodded. “Willie, were you really hunting beeswax -across the river?”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_104">104</div> -<p>“Of course I was, Jim. We have no wax for the church -candles, so I went to hunt a bee tree. Now I’ll get someone -to go with me to get the honey and wax.”</p> -<p>“Are you responsible for the candles, Willie?”</p> -<p>“Not entirely, Jim. I am a ward of Father Gibault and -I help him in any way I can.</p> -<p>“My father was a river man on the Ohio. He worked -for Boynton, Wharton and Morgan Company. They -used to send boatloads of merchandise from Philadelphia -down the Ohio and up the Mississippi Rivers to their -store here. My father made many trips for them, but he -was drowned in 1772. So Father Gibault found a house -for my mother and me next door to him.”</p> -<p>“Then you live with your mother?”</p> -<p>“Yes, I do. She sews for some of the wealthy people -and mends for Father Gibault. In the winter I work for -Monsieur Gabriel Cerré.”</p> -<p>Jim’s face was sad for a moment. “My mother was a -good seamstress, too.”</p> -<p>Willie was puzzled. “Say, where are your mother and -father? How do you happen to be with Clark’s army?”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_105">105</div> -<p>Then Jim told Willie about the last time he had seen -his parents and what had happened to him since.</p> -<p>“That’s too bad, Jim,” Willie said. “Of course Indians -do sometimes kill their prisoners, but it’s likely your -parents are still alive. What are you going to do now?”</p> -<p>Jim sighed. “I hope I’ll find them some day. Maybe -Colonel Clark will have a job for me. I’d like to stay with -him and his men.”</p> -<p>Willie smiled. “If he doesn’t, Jim, I think I can get you -a job working with me. Monsieur Cerré is a big merchant -here and needs quite a few people in the fall. He’s -away from Kaskaskia right now.”</p> -<p>Jim nodded. “I may ask you later, Willie, because I -have to find something to do.”</p> -<p>“Guess I’d better go home now, Jim. Will you come -home with me?”</p> -<p>“No thanks, Willie. I have to see what Colonel Clark -has in mind for me.”</p> -<p>“Well, good-bye, for now,” and Willie ran happily -down the street toward Father Gibault’s house.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_106">106</div> -<p>Jim walked slowly over to Colonel Clark’s headquarters. -When he arrived Captain Bowman and a few -French citizens were just leaving. Clark was giving them -last-minute instructions.</p> -<p>“Captain Bowman,” he was saying, “use all your persuasive -powers and those of these good citizens,” he -nodded toward the Frenchmen, “to get the people of -Cahokia to swear allegiance to our Continental Congress. -No violence, though.”</p> -<p>“Yes, sir,” Captain Bowman replied, saluting smartly. -“I think I can win them over with the help of these men.” -Then he and the Frenchmen left headquarters for their -ride to Cahokia.</p> -<p>After they had gone Colonel Clark noticed Jim standing -in the room. “Hello, Jim. What is it?”</p> -<p>“I wonder, sir,” he began, “if you have a job for me. -You see I have no home here, as Willie has.”</p> -<p>Colonel Clark frowned for a moment and then smiled. -“To be sure, I have a job for you, Jim. You can be my -personal messenger. Now that we have won Kaskaskia, -I have to deal with the Indian tribes camped in this neighborhood.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_107">107</div> -<p>“Yes, sir.”</p> -<p>“Are you a good penman, Jim?”</p> -<p>“I can write a good hand, sir. My mother used to be a -governess in Virginia and she taught me to read, write -and figure.”</p> -<p>“Good. I have a lot of letters to write and you can help -me with them, too. You’ll sleep here at headquarters and -eat with my men. Tomorrow you’ll have plenty of work -to do.”</p> -<p>“Oh, thank you, sir.” Jim’s heart was singing. All -would be well with him if he could stay with Colonel -Clark.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_108">108</div> -<div class="img"> -<img src="images/p15.jpg" alt="uncaptioned" width="800" height="396" /> -</div> -<h2 id="c7"><span class="h2line1">Chapter VII</span> -<br /><span class="h2line2">NO ADOPTION</span></h2> -<p>George Rogers Clark’s sudden appearance in the -French settlements with his army threw the Indians -camping there into a panic. They thought the army -larger than it was and expected to be attacked momentarily. -Some tribes asked their French friends in Kaskaskia -and Cahokia what they should do.</p> -<p>The French, who were now firm friends of the Long-Knives, -advised them to call upon Clark and sue for -peace. Then these same Frenchmen reported to Clark -that the Indians had come to them for advice.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_109">109</div> -<p>Colonel Clark was quick to take advantage of the Indians’ -confusion. He prepared a letter to be sent to the -tribes, telling them to lay down their tomahawks and -ally themselves with him, or to fight like men for the -English. Jim Hudson made several copies of this letter, -which Clark sent by him and other messengers to the different -tribes.</p> -<p>The Kickapoos and Piankeshaws signed treaties immediately -with the Long-Knives. Other tribes, however——the -Chippewas, Ottawas, Potawatomis, Sacs and -Foxes——came into Cahokia and demanded a council -with Clark. They wanted to see the chief Long-Knife -and to hear what he had to say.</p> -<p>Colonel Clark sent word to them that he would attend -their council, but he took his time about going to Cahokia -to meet with them. He thought it would be well for the -Indians to wait on him. After a while he took Jim Hudson, -some of his officers and many of his soldiers to Cahokia, -which had sworn allegiance to him through Captain -Bowman.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_110">110</div> -<p>Clark’s new headquarters were in a house beside the -Cahokia River. In a few days a band of Winnebagos, -often called Stinkers by the French, pitched camp in a -Frenchman’s yard, just across the road from Clark’s headquarters.</p> -<p>When Jim Hudson saw the Indians he was frightened -and said to Colonel Clark, “I don’t think those Stinkers -should camp so near you, sir. They might attack us. We -don’t have many soldiers here.”</p> -<p>The colonel’s eyes twinkled. “How right you are, Jim. -I think they have something like that in mind. Perhaps -they want to kidnap me so I can’t appear at the council.”</p> -<p>Jim shivered. “Oh, sir! Can’t you recall some of the -men you have stationed around the town?”</p> -<p>“Jim, you have the mark of a military man,” Colonel -Clark replied. “That’s what I intend to do, but I don’t -want these Stinkers to know about my reinforcements. -You go to my captains now and tell them to send several -guard details to my headquarters as soon as it is dark. -Tell them to come in one by one at the rear.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_111">111</div> -<p>“Yes, sir,” Jim replied, glad to have an errand and to -know they were to have more soldiers at headquarters. -He dashed out to find Captain Helm and Simon Kenton.</p> -<p>That evening fifty guards began filtering into headquarters, -some to conceal themselves in the house, others -to stand in the darkness outside. Although Clark walked -alone about the yard, nothing happened.</p> -<p>The next night the guards again took up their same stations. -Colonel Clark stayed up late, supposedly working -on reports.</p> -<p>Jim couldn’t sleep, so he went to the window and -stared out into the night. About one o’clock shots were -fired across the river. In a few minutes Jim saw some -skulking figures in the headquarters yard. He wanted to -scream, but Clark himself gave the alarm.</p> -<p>Immediately the guards appeared from all sides of the -building. They succeeded in capturing three of the Stinkers -and hustled them into headquarters. The shots and -ensuing racket awakened the town; some of the citizens -hurried to headquarters to see what was the matter.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_112">112</div> -<p>To Jim’s great surprise, the colonel asked these Frenchmen -what punishment they thought these Stinkers deserved. -In one voice they said these Indians should be -put in irons. Then and there, Clark made this an order. -Thus he maneuvered so that the French suggested the -punishment for the Indians.</p> -<p>The next morning Colonel Clark went to the great Indian -council, accompanied by some of his officers and -townsmen. At the last minute he told Jim he might go. -He also had the three Stinkers brought to the council in -chains. How ridiculous they looked clanking along beside -the officers.</p> -<p>Jim was amazed at the number of Indians awaiting -Colonel Clark’s arrival. Jim looked over the crowd to see -if he could see Chief Minnemung or any of his Potawatomis. -If they were there he could not locate them in the -vast throng.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_113">113</div> -<p>He glanced at his colonel, wondering if he were not -frightened among so many Indians. But Clark looked as -if he were master of the entire council. Fear was not a -part of George Rogers Clark’s character; and since the -Indians had asked him to come to the council, he waited -for them to speak.</p> -<p>After a few minutes a tall, erect, haughty chief, dressed -in a handsome buffalo robe, came forward to stand directly -in front of Colonel Clark. “Chief Long-Knife,” he -began, “we hope the Great Spirit has brought us together -for good and that we may be received as friends. The bad -bird British ordered us to attack your countrymen.”</p> -<p>He turned and motioned for one of his tribesmen to -bring something to him. When the Indian brought him a -bloody belt, some red wampum and two British flags, -the chief threw them to the floor and stomped upon them.</p> -<p>“We have received these emblems of war from the bad -bird British and now we hope peace with you will take -the place of the bloody belt of war.” Then the chief -walked back to his people. Other chiefs came up asking -for peace. Even the Winnebagos came up and offered -the peace pipe to Colonel Clark.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_114">114</div> -<p>He waved them away, however, because he knew it -was best to keep the Winnebagos in suspense for a while -about the fate of their Stinker relatives still in chains. -Then he told all chiefs who had made speeches that he -would consider their offer and give them an answer the -next day. He left the council with his staff, and all the -townspeople and Jim.</p> -<p>The next morning after the council fires were kindled -anew, George Rogers Clark gave his answer to the waiting -Indians. He told them why the Long-Knives were at -war with the British, and that the British had become so -weak they were forced to hire Indians to fight for them. -He also told them the French king, father of all their -French friends, had also joined the Long-Knives against -the British.</p> -<p>Finally he said, “Now you can judge who is right, the -Long-Knives or the British. Here is the bloody belt of -war, here the white belt of peace. Take the one you -please. Behave like men though, and choose the one you -wish.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_115">115</div> -<div class="img"> -<img src="images/p16.jpg" alt="uncaptioned" width="800" height="1093" /> -</div> -<div class="pb" id="Page_116">116</div> -<p>“I do not want you to give me an answer until you have -time to counsel. We will part, and when you are ready, if -the Great Spirit will bring us together again, let us prove -ourselves worthy by speaking and thinking with one -heart and one tongue.” Then Colonel Clark and his -group left the council, not returning until the Indians sent -for him.</p> -<p>They had assembled with their peace pipes, and many -chiefs made flowery speeches about their intended friendship -with the Long-Knives. Later they smoked their -peace pipes and offered them to Clark, who went through -the pipe-smoking ceremony with them.</p> -<p>Jim Hudson knew Indians did not always keep their -word; how he hoped Colonel Clark knew it, too.</p> -<p>These council meetings went on for days until Jim -grew weary of attending them. One morning, however, -he was surprised to see two stalwart young Winnebagos -present themselves in front of Colonel Clark, then fall to -the ground and cover themselves with a blanket.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_117">117</div> -<p>Jim did not know what to make of this and looked -questioningly at the colonel. George Rogers Clark’s face -did not change expression as he waited to see what would -happen next.</p> -<p>One of the Winnebago chiefs stepped forward; he explained -that these two young men were offering themselves -as a sacrifice to atone for what their Winnebago -relatives had done at Clark’s headquarters.</p> -<p>Colonel Clark did not reply at once, but kept staring at -the blanket covering the two men. Jim and the rest -waited anxiously, expecting the colonel to order the Winnebagos -killed immediately, or at least to be cast into -irons.</p> -<p>To everyone’s amazement, Colonel Clark rose and ordered -the two Indians to stand. Then he took each of -them by the hand as brothers and introduced them to his -officers and the Frenchmen sitting with his group. A loud -murmur of approval arose from the surprised Indians. -Still more surprising to Jim was Clark’s order to free the -Stinkers who had tried to kidnap him.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_118">118</div> -<p>All during these meetings Jim had looked in vain for -the Potawatomis with whom he had spent the winter; he -wondered if they had ever arrived in Cahokia. The day -after Clark had freed the Stinkers, Jim discovered Chief -Minnemung and his clan sitting near the front of the assembly. -For a moment he was afraid—would these Potawatomis -try to capture him again? Then he glanced at -Colonel Clark and realized he was safe where he was.</p> -<p>At this council meeting Big Gate, one of the great Potawatomi -chiefs, spoke for the entire tribe, saying they were -ready to sign a peace treaty with the Long-Knives. When -the treaty was signed, Colonel Clark and his staff rose to -leave. Suddenly Chief Minnemung barred his path.</p> -<p>“Big Long-Knife, chief of all the Long-Knives,” Minnemung -began, nodding toward Jim, “this boy ran away -from our clan. I planned to adopt him as my own son.”</p> -<p>Jim began to tremble when Colonel Clark turned to -him, all the while pretending he had never known of -Minnemung’s plan. “Jim,” he said sternly, “is this true?”</p> -<p>“Yes, sir,” Jim stammered, “but I didn’t want——”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_119">119</div> -<p>Chief Minnemung gestured impatiently, as he interrupted -Jim. “Big Long-Knife, I say Chief Minnemung -no longer wants to adopt this boy. He not make good -Potawatomi. He is Jim Long-Knife. Chief Minnemung -is no longer interested in him. He now belongs to Big -Long-Knife Clark.”</p> -<p>Jim sighed in relief as Clark said gravely, “So be it, -Chief Minnemung. I accept this boy as Jim Long-Knife.” -He extended his hand to the Potawatomi chief -to seal their bargain.</p> -<p>Chief Minnemung shook hands with Clark without -glancing at Jim. Then he walked proudly to his clan.</p> -<p>George Rogers Clark could be stern no longer. As he -looked at Jim for a moment, his hazel eyes twinkled in -fun. “I guess this makes you safe, Jim. You are now under -my control and a real Long-Knife. Chief Minnemung -has decreed it. Jim Long-Knife. That’s a fine -name for you.”</p> -<p>Jim smiled. “Oh, sir, thank you. I’m so glad Chief -Minnemung doesn’t want me. I saw him sitting with the -other Indians today, and I was afraid he might have his -men take me prisoner again sometime.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_120">120</div> -<div class="img"> -<img src="images/p17.jpg" alt="uncaptioned" width="800" height="424" /> -</div> -<h2 id="c8"><span class="h2line1">Chapter VIII</span> -<br /><span class="h2line2">A PEACEFUL INTERVAL</span></h2> -<p>While Clark was counseling and making treaties with -the different Indian tribes at Cahokia, he was also sending -men on different missions throughout the western -country.</p> -<p>For the most important mission he chose Father Gibault -and Dr. Laffont, an influential citizen of Kaskaskia. -They were to take a proclamation to the French settlers at -Vincennes, asking them to renounce their fidelity to the -British king, George III and swear allegiance to the -Americans.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_121">121</div> -<p>Since Father Gibault was well known and respected -for his earlier good works among the people there and -Dr. Laffont was a most persuasive man, the French settlers -willingly took their oath of allegiance to the Americans.</p> -<p>Both men returned to Colonel Clark with this good -news long before his negotiations with the Indians were -completed. Then Clark dispatched Captain Helm to -take charge of Fort Sackville at Vincennes.</p> -<p>Now that the three French villages, Kaskaskia, Cahokia -and Vincennes were in American hands, about half -of Clark’s volunteers returned to their homes in Kentucky -and Virginia. Those who stayed acted not only as -guards for the American headquarters, but reinforced -the French garrisons at Kaskaskia and Cahokia against -possible Indian attack.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_122">122</div> -<p>Jim didn’t know how to occupy his time, now that -Colonel Clark didn’t seem to need him. One evening -he decided to ask the colonel about it. “I have nothing to -do here, Colonel Clark,” he began. “I could go back to -Kentucky to see what’s left of our farm. I wouldn’t be -afraid to stay there alone, sir, and I could start clearing -more land.”</p> -<p>Colonel Clark fidgeted in his chair. “I know you -aren’t afraid, Jim, but I wouldn’t think of letting you go -back alone. You’d be a perfect target for Indians. They -haven’t all signed treaties, remember. Even so, I don’t -trust these redskins too far. Now if your parents——”</p> -<p>“But, sir,” Jim interrupted, “I don’t know if my parents——”</p> -<p>“I know, lad. It’ll be time enough for you to go back -to your farm when we locate your father and mother. I -have asked every man who has gone out from here to be -on the lookout for the Hudsons. They are to ask in every -settlement if any one has seen or heard of them. It’s a -slow sort of grapevine method, I know, but word gets -around that way. We’ll find them, Jim, some day.”</p> -<p>Jim’s blue eyes misted with tears. “Oh, Colonel Clark, -you think of everything. No wonder you’re such a good -military leader.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_123">123</div> -<p>“You can stay on at headquarters with me, Jim. That -will give you a roof over your head and three meals a -day.” He stared at Jim for a moment and then grinned. -“I’ll have to find a buckskin outfit for you too, lad. Even -if you are Jim Long-Knife, that ragged blue outfit you’re -wearing must be replaced.”</p> -<p>Jim laughed. “These are the clothes the Potawatomis -gave me. I have no others. The Shawnees took the ones -my mother was taking to Harrodsburg.”</p> -<p>“And you’ll need some work to do, Jim, to keep you -out of mischief.”</p> -<p>“I can get a job, I’m sure. Willie told me he could get -work for me with Monsieur Gabriel Cerré, the wealthy -merchant here. Willie works for him.”</p> -<p>Colonel Clark frowned. “Willie? Who’s Willie?”</p> -<p>Jim seemed surprised. “Willie Watson, sir. The boy -we found in the boat the night we took Kaskaskia.”</p> -<p>Clark nodded. “To be sure. I remember you told me -about him, but I didn’t notice him that night. What does -he do for Monsieur Cerré?”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_124">124</div> -<p>“He sorts fur pelts and counts them. I saw him yesterday -and he has already started the fall work.”</p> -<p>“It sounds like a good job, Jim. Ask Willie to take you -to see Monsieur Cerré.”</p> -<p>“Yes, sir. I’ll go over now and see Willie.”</p> -<p>Jim started over to the fur depot to find Willie, but on -the way he saw him coming. “Oh, Willie.”</p> -<p>“Hello, Jim. Still running errands for Colonel Clark?”</p> -<p>“No. I guess my work with him is over. I was just -coming to see if you could get me a job with Monsieur -Cerré.”</p> -<p>Willie smiled. “Sure. Just today the men were saying -they needed another boy to sort pelts this fall.”</p> -<p>“Can we go tomorrow?”</p> -<p>Willie shook his head. “There isn’t going to be any -work tomorrow. The men have to wait for some supplies -coming up from New Orleans. I’ll be glad to take you as -soon as the depot opens again. I’ve just been talking to -Father Gibault about getting the beeswax and honey -from that bee tree I marked for him.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_125">125</div> -<p>“Haven’t you been across the river since that night?”</p> -<p>“No. You see Father Gibault thought it would be easier -to get later in the fall. But since there’s no work tomorrow -he said I might go after it, if I could get someone -to help me. Would you like to go along with me?”</p> -<p>Jim’s eyes sparkled. “Sure, if Colonel Clark says I -may.”</p> -<p>“Come over about ten o’clock then. We can’t go too -early as we have to wait until most of the bees are out of -the hive.”</p> -<p>“I’ll be there, Willie.”</p> -<p>“Be sure to wear your moccasins—” Willie looked -doubtfully at Jim’s thin, worn clothes, “and you’d better -get some buckskin clothes to wear. Bees can’t sting -through buckskin.”</p> -<p>“All right. See you tomorrow.”</p> -<p>Colonel Clark said Jim might go after the honey, but -added he couldn’t go unless they found some buckskin -clothes for him to wear. He hunted through some of the -supplies at headquarters and found a buckskin outfit.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_126">126</div> -<p>When Jim arrived at Willie’s house, Willie was ready -and waiting for him. He handed Jim one large wooden -bucket and carried another himself. “We’ll put the honey -and wax in these buckets,” Willie explained. Then he -picked up a gaily colored cloth bundle.</p> -<p>The two boys put out in one of Father Gibault’s boats -and soon crossed the Kaskaskia River, landing near the -house which Clark had surrounded the night he made -his march on Kaskaskia.</p> -<p>Willie moored the boat to a tree along the bank. Then -they started out to find the tree Willie had marked with -Father Gibault’s initials. They wandered quite a way before -Willie suddenly cried, “See, Jim, there it is!” He -pointed to a tree with a large fork high above the ground.</p> -<p>Jim also saw the initials F. G. on the trunk; these -Willie had carved the day the Long-Knives had found -him in the boat. “Why did you put Father Gibault’s initials -there, Willie?”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_127">127</div> -<p>“Why, to show the honey belonged to Father Gibault. -No one will steal honey from a marked tree,” Willie explained -as he untied his cloth bundle. Out tumbled two -blue <i>capots</i> or cloaks with hoods, two small scarfs and -two pairs of mittens. Then he took out a long, sharp -knife from the pocket of one of the <i>capots</i>. “Now we’ll -get dressed to tackle the bees.”</p> -<p>Jim picked up the larger <i>capot</i> and tried it on. “I can’t -wear this, Willie. It’s too small.”</p> -<p>Willie had already put on his <i>capot</i> and adjusted its -hood over his head. “You can’t? Say, you’re bigger than -I thought. That’s my mother’s <i>capot</i>, but I guess you -need a man-sized one. Just put the hood over your head -and let the cloak fly,” he suggested as he tied a scarf over -his face.</p> -<p>Jim looked at the <i>capot</i> dubiously. “Why are we wearing -all this stuff anyway, Willie?”</p> -<p>“To keep the bees from stinging us, of course.”</p> -<p>“We’ll smother, Willie, and we can’t see with the scarfs -over our faces.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_128">128</div> -<p>Willie nodded. “That’s right. I’m a stupid ox not to -think of that. Well, I’ll fix it.” He picked up the knife -and cut two slits in each scarf. “Now we have peepholes. -Put one on, and the mittens too, Jim. If the bees are in a -bad mood, they can’t sting us through the buckskin and -these winter clothes.”</p> -<p>Jim put them on and then asked, “Now what do -we do?”</p> -<p>“I’ll climb up and start cutting the honey and wax -away. It’s up there in a deep hole in the fork of the tree. -You put your bucket at the base of the tree and I’ll try to -drop the honey and wax into it. This is a beautiful day, -so maybe most of the bees will be gone from their hive.”</p> -<p>Jim watched as Willie climbed the tree. What a ridiculous -sight he was, with the blue <i>capot</i> flapping against his -skinny legs.</p> -<p>Willie thrust the long knife into the hole and began -turning it slowly around and around. Only a few bees -emerged and buzzed around his blue hood.</p> -<p>“Fix the bucket, Jim,” Willie called as the honey began -oozing down the tree.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_129">129</div> -<p>Jim put his bucket under the tree and began slapping -at a few bees that were buzzing all around him.</p> -<p>“Don’t fight them, Jim. It makes them angry. Just let -them buzz and I don’t think they’ll sting you.”</p> -<p>Soon Willie had rolled out so much honey and beeswax -that his bucket would not hold it all. When both buckets -were filled, Willie came down from the tree. “Now you -carry one and I’ll carry the other.”</p> -<p>Quite a bit of honey had trickled down the tree, so the -bees stayed behind, instead of following Willie and Jim.</p> -<p>As the boys walked back through the woods, Willie -looked admiringly at Jim. “I didn’t realize you’re so -much larger than I am,” Willie said. “Why, you’re as -tall as lots of men. How old are you?”</p> -<p>Jim smiled. “I guess I grew a lot while I was with the -Potawatomis. I’m thir—why, Willie, I’m fourteen now. -I forgot all about my birthday this year. But no wonder, -I was fourteen the day after we captured Kaskaskia the -fifth of July.”</p> -<p>Willie stood as tall as he could. “Why, I’m almost as -old as you, Jim. I’ll be fourteen the second of January.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_130">130</div> -<p>Jim was almost a head taller than Willie. He looked -down at the younger boy and smiled. “You will? I -thought you were about twelve.”</p> -<p>“I may be short, but I can do lots of things that men -can’t do,” Willie replied.</p> -<p>“Oh, I’m sure of that,” Jim agreed.</p> -<p>Father Gibault was delighted with the amount of -honey and wax that the boys brought back, and gave half -the honey to Jim for Colonel Clark and his men. When -Willie told him Jim would like to work alongside of him, -Father Gibault said he would put in a good word for him -to Monsieur Cerré.</p> -<p>A few days later Jim went with Willie to the fur depot -to see Monsieur Cerré. The merchant put him to work -with Willie, sorting and counting the pelts which Indians -and French <i>voyageurs</i> had brought into Kaskaskia during -the fall and winter.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_131">131</div> -<p>Jim and Willie became the best of friends, spending -many long evenings together either at Willie’s house or at -Colonel Clark’s headquarters. Jim taught him to play his -drum; Willie was such an apt pupil and so filled with -rhythm that he soon played as well as Jim. In return Willie -taught Jim all the gay lilting French songs he knew.</p> -<p>Jim enjoyed living in Kaskaskia; if his parents had -been with him, he would have willingly spent the rest of -his life among the French. They were a gay light-hearted -people, always ready to stop work and have fun.</p> -<p>The men played cards endlessly on the outdoor galleries -until winter winds drove them indoors. There were -many church festivals to attend, dances for the boys to -watch and always excellent food. At Christmas time -there were many gay parties given for the French citizens -and Clark’s soldiers.</p> -<p>On New Year’s Day of 1779 came the best day of all. -The whole village turned out in its finest clothes to call at -the homes of well-to-do folk.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_132">132</div> -<p>And what a colorful procession they made; the men -wore silken hose and bright silver shoe buckles, their -richly trimmed coats open to show their fancy, embroidered -waistcoats; the women dressed in feathered finery -imported from France by way of New Orleans and the -Mississippi River. Ordinary French settlers wore buckskin -trousers and long colored cotton shirts belted in by -colored bead sashes tied behind, and topped by the familiar -blue <i>capots</i>. Now and then there appeared in the -crowd a soldier in an ancient French uniform, or a <i>voyageur</i> -in his leather ruffled shirt and brightly colored cap -with bobbing tassel.</p> -<p>Jim found life good in Kaskaskia until one afternoon -in late January. On the twenty-ninth day of the month -Jim came home from work and met a well-dressed gentleman -just leaving Colonel Clark’s headquarters. Jim -wondered who this man was.</p> -<p>As Jim walked into the house, George Rogers Clark -was pacing the floor and running his hand nervously -through his shock of red hair. He didn’t even see Jim -come in, but continued to pace back and forth. Jim took -off his coat and hung it in the closet. Then he came back -into the large living room.</p> -<p>“Is something wrong, Colonel?”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_133">133</div> -<p>Clark stopped and turned toward Jim. “Hello, Jim. I -didn’t hear you come in. Yes, I’ve just received some bad -news.”</p> -<p>“From the gentleman who was leaving as I came into -the house?”</p> -<p>“Oh, did you see him? That was Francis Vigo, a Spanish -merchant from St. Louis. I had asked him to see -about Captain Helm’s supplies, since he was going on a -merchandising trip to Vincennes.”</p> -<p>“Yes, sir.” Jim waited, seeing Colonel Clark was quite -upset.</p> -<p>“I’ve had no word from Captain Helm for a long -time,” Clark continued. “And that’s not like Helm, so I -was a bit uneasy. Vigo told me that he himself was captured -and taken to Fort Sackville. There he was confronted -by Lieutenant Governor Hamilton. You see, -Jim, Hamilton captured Fort Sackville on the seventeenth -of December and Captain Helm is now his prisoner. -The British are again in control of Fort Sackville -and Vincennes.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_134">134</div> -<p>Jim gasped. “Do you mean Hamilton from Detroit?”</p> -<p>“The very same. He took all of Vigo’s merchandise -from him and wouldn’t release him until Vigo promised -not to return to Kaskaskia on his way home to St. Louis.” -Clark smiled wryly. “Vigo kept his promise too. He -went home to St. Louis, then came over here immediately -to tell me about Helm.”</p> -<p>Jim looked puzzled. “What does it mean for us now -that Hamilton is in Vincennes?”</p> -<p>“Vigo told me Hamilton plans to attack Kaskaskia as -soon as the weather permits, some time in the spring. -He’s supposed to have an army of eight hundred men, -counting the Indians and his prisoners.”</p> -<p>“Eight hundred!” Jim gasped. There weren’t eight -hundred people in the two towns of Kaskaskia and Cahokia.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_135">135</div> -<p>Colonel Clark resumed his pacing back and forth as -though he had forgotten Jim. After a time he stopped -suddenly. “Attack at once, Jim. That’s what we’ll do.” -He brought his fist down hard in the palm of his hand. -“It’s our only chance. We’ll attack Hamilton now when -he thinks it’s impossible. But we’ll make it.”</p> -<p>Jim’s blue eyes sparkled reflecting Clark’s confidence. -“Yes, sir. What can I do to help you now?”</p> -<p>“Run to Father Gibault’s and ask him if he will come -to my headquarters at once. Then see if you can find -Captain Charleville and tell him to report to me immediately. -But do not tell them or anyone else what I have -just told you. Do not even mention Vigo’s visit.”</p> -<p>“No, sir, I won’t.”</p> -<p>Colonel Clark then called one of his officers who had -been asleep upstairs. “You,” he nodded toward the man -as soon as he appeared, “ride to Cahokia tonight. Tell -Captain McCarty to bring his company back from Cahokia -immediately.”</p> -<p>“Yes, sir,” replied the officer.</p> -<p>Jim dashed out of the house toward Father Gibault’s, -while Clark’s officer mounted his horse and set off at a -gallop for Cahokia.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_136">136</div> -<p>Father Gibault and Captain Charleville returned to -headquarters with Jim almost immediately. George -Rogers Clark told them the bad news of Vincennes and -what he had in mind to do.</p> -<p>Father Gibault looked grave for a few minutes and -then said, “Colonel Clark, I’m not a military man, but I -think your plan of attack is good. God willing, you will -make it.”</p> -<p>Captain Charleville sat forward in his chair. “Colonel -Clark, there aren’t many of your Virginia volunteers here -now, but I’m sure I can raise a company among the villagers.”</p> -<p>Colonel Clark nodded. “We’ll have to have volunteers, -Charleville. I don’t have more than eighty men, including -the men under Captain McCarty at Cahokia. I’ve -sent for him to return with them. We can’t do anything -more until morning, gentlemen. Thank you for responding -so quickly.”</p> -<p>“I’ll have a full company raised before sunset tomorrow, -sir,” Captain Charleville promised.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_137">137</div> -<div class="img"> -<img src="images/p18.jpg" alt="uncaptioned" width="789" height="337" /> -</div> -<h2 id="c9"><span class="h2line1">Chapter IX</span> -<br /><span class="h2line2">THROUGH THE DROWNED LANDS</span></h2> -<p>The next morning Father Gibault rang the church bell, -signaling all people to assemble at the church. Immediately -the villagers came streaming out of their houses or -stores. Colonel Clark and Jim waited outside for them to -appear. Jim had brought his drum, and played it loudly -to attract their attention.</p> -<p>Willie Watson came running to the church; when he -saw Jim, he pushed through the crowd to him.</p> -<p>“What’s all the excitement, Jim? What’s happened?” -Willie asked breathlessly.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_138">138</div> -<p>Jim didn’t lose a drumbeat as he replied, “Wait and -find out, Willie. Colonel Clark is going to talk to the people.”</p> -<p>As soon as everyone was quiet, Father Gibault told -them that Colonel Clark had an important message for -them. Then Colonel Clark told them that even now -Hamilton was in command of Vincennes and was planning -to attack Kaskaskia as soon as the weather permitted.</p> -<p>Before the citizens could recover from this shock, -Clark had outlined his plan of an immediate march on -Vincennes and a surprise attack on Fort Sackville. He -said he would need volunteers to help build a supply boat -he would send ahead for his army.</p> -<p>“I’ll help. I’ll help,” came the cry of the men from -every quarter.</p> -<p>“And we’ll help, too,” the women cried. “We’ll make -flags for your army. You’ll need banners to carry.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_139">139</div> -<p>Colonel Clark smiled and nodded. “Those of you who -will help with the boat and supplies, step over on this side. -And you who will volunteer to go to Vincennes, sign up -with Captain Charleville.”</p> -<p>The men quickly made their choices, and Jim began to -play his drum again to interest the men in joining Captain -Charleville’s company.</p> -<p>“Jim,” asked Willie, who had stood quietly up to now, -“are you going to Vincennes?”</p> -<p>“Of course, Willie. I haven’t asked Colonel Clark, but -he’ll be needing a drummer, I know.”</p> -<p>“If you’re going, I am, too,” Willie said, excitement -making his voice shrill. “I think my mother has a rifle -which belonged to my father. I can take it with me.”</p> -<p>Jim looked doubtfully at Willie. “Can you fire a rifle?”</p> -<p>Willie shook his head. “No, but I can learn.”</p> -<p>Jim grinned. “It takes a lot of practice, Willie, but I’ve -an idea. If you’ll let me have your father’s rifle, I’ll let -you take my drum. You can play it well, and I’ve had -experience with rifles. My father taught me to use one.”</p> -<p>Willie smiled. “Will you, Jim? Sure—you can have -the rifle.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_140">140</div> -<p>“I don’t think we’d better say anything to Colonel -Clark until it’s time to go,” Jim cautioned. “He might -think of an excuse to keep us from going with him.”</p> -<p>“All right, Jim. Mum’s the word, but I’ll manage to -get the rifle.”</p> -<p>By nightfall Captain Charleville had raised his company -of Kaskaskia volunteers. The women were so enthusiastic -about the undertaking that they worked furiously -for the next two days, making flags of various colors -and designs. When they were presented to Colonel -Clark, he didn’t know what he would do with so many -flags. But he thanked the ladies gravely and packed their -gift with the army supplies.</p> -<p>On the third of February Captain McCarty arrived -from Cahokia with his volunteers. That same day the -men finished work on the riverboat, which Clark had -named the <i>Willing</i>. They had made it into a warship -equipped with armament of two four-pounders and four -swivels. It required a crew of forty men to man, and -Clark put Captain John Rogers in charge of it.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_141">141</div> -<p>He ordered Rogers to go down the Kaskaskia and Mississippi -Rivers to the Ohio and ascend the Ohio and Wabash -Rivers; then he was to take his station thirty miles -below Vincennes and wait there for further orders. The -next day Captain Rogers and his crew set out on the warship -with supplies, stores and ammunition.</p> -<p>At three o’clock in the afternoon of February fifth, -Clark’s army was ready to march. Jim had had to talk -long and hard to get Clark’s permission to go with the -troops; he had made no mention of Willie. But Willie -stood beside Jim, carrying his father’s rifle, which protruded -above his head.</p> -<p>As the army, one hundred-thirty men strong, stood -waiting, Father Gibault made a little talk to the men and -gave them his blessing and absolution. All the women -and men not able to go with Clark were on hand to bid -the troops good-bye and wish them Godspeed.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_142">142</div> -<p>George Rogers Clark rode in front on a magnificent -stallion, followed by his officers, also mounted. Jim -Long-Knife Hudson, wearing an ill-fitting buckskin suit -and beating his drum, stepped out proudly. Willie Watson -dropped back to the rear of the second company, fearing -Colonel Clark would see him and send him home because -of his age and size.</p> -<p>The rest of the men, clad in worn buckskin trousers -and hunting shirts, swung out jauntily, their heads held -high. Some carried rifles and some tomahawks, since -there weren’t enough rifles for everyone. A motley array—Clark’s -pioneer army, and at the same time a magnificent -column of spirited soldiers.</p> -<p>The whole of the flat Illinois country between Kaskaskia -and Vincennes was freezing water and half-frozen -mud. Two hundred and forty miles lay between the -army and Vincennes, but the men bravely started out. By -nightfall, however, they had covered only three miles. It -was rainy and drizzly, so they spent an uncomfortable -night without tents or shelter of any kind. The next day -they remained in camp.</p> -<p>That night Colonel Clark spied Willie Watson for the -first time. “Willie!” he cried, “what are you doing here?”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_143">143</div> -<p>Willie trembled but stood his ground. “I’m marching -with you to take Fort Sackville, sir,” he replied.</p> -<p>Clark shook his head. “You’re too young, Willie, for -this trip. If I had seen you earlier, you would have remained -at home.”</p> -<p>Willie grinned mischievously. “Yes, sir. I’ve taken -pains to stay out of your sight, sir. I was afraid you -wouldn’t let me come along. And I’m fourteen years old, -as old as Jim Hudson. I brought my father’s rifle too.”</p> -<p>Clark smiled and then shook his head. “I admire your -spirit, Willie. Can you fire your rifle?”</p> -<p>Willie shook his head slowly. “No, sir, I can’t. But -Jim is going to take my rifle and I’ll play his drum.”</p> -<p>Colonel Clark looked grave. “Since it’s too late to -send you home, Willie, I guess you’ll just have to stay.”</p> -<p>Willie smiled. “Oh, sir, thank you. I’ll make it. You -won’t regret my coming, sir.”</p> -<p>The next day the soldiers marched for nine hours, then -pitched camp in a square on the driest ground they could -find, putting their baggage in the center.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_144">144</div> -<p>As they continued through succeeding days they -marched sometimes through water up to their armpits. -They had to hold rifles and powder high above their -heads to keep them dry.</p> -<p>In desperation Clark and his officers dismounted and -piled the baggage on their horses. The animals struggled -along through the water with the men.</p> -<p>If any men happened to see any wild game, Colonel -Clark gave them time to shoot it. Now and then they -bagged a deer and on the twelfth of February they sighted -a herd of buffalo.</p> -<p>“Here, Willie,” Jim called, “take my drum and give -me your rifle. Maybe I can get a buffalo.”</p> -<p>Willie handed over the rifle, as Jim noticed with satisfaction -it was exactly like his father’s. He dashed out -with two soldiers to shoot one of the buffalos. He went -as close as he dared to the herd, took careful aim and -fired. His buffalo dropped immediately as did several -others which the men shot. In a few minutes they had -dragged the buffaloes over toward the fires.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_145">145</div> -<div class="img"> -<img src="images/p19.jpg" alt="uncaptioned" width="800" height="1042" /> -</div> -<div class="pb" id="Page_146">146</div> -<p>“Good boy, Jim,” Willie said, clapping him on the -back excitedly. “We’ll eat plenty tonight.”</p> -<p>Clark’s army did eat a good meal and had entertainment -afterward. Willie and Jim sang many of the songs -they had learned together, and took turns playing the -drum. Willie also danced a strange mixture of French -and Indian dances until he was exhausted.</p> -<p>That evening the two boys helped boost the morale of -Clark’s army more than anyone else save the colonel himself. -Colonel Clark was quick to give them credit. “We -could never have made it this far, boys,” he said, “without -your music and dancing.”</p> -<p>The boys were exhausted from their performance; Jim -was too tired to say a word. But Willie grinned at Colonel -Clark and said, “I told you, sir, you wouldn’t regret letting -me come with you.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_147">147</div> -<p>During their first six days this remarkable army -marched over one hundred and seventy-four miles, averaging -twenty-eight miles a day. The hardest part of the -trip, however, lay before them——the sixty-three miles to -Vincennes. They would have four rivers to cross—two -branches of the Little Wabash, the Embarrass and the -Great Wabash, all of them now swollen by floods.</p> -<p>When the army reached the two Little Wabash -branches, normally three miles apart, the men were -stunned to see a sheet of water almost five miles across, -with no dry banks or channels for either branch in sight. -The shallowest place was about three feet deep; what -the greatest depth was, no man knew.</p> -<p>Colonel Clark ordered his soldiers to halt while he considered -what to do. For a few minutes he gazed at the -great expanse of water, then ordered some of the men to -build a pirogue. This took only a day to build. Then he -ordered a few others to explore these drowned lands and -if possible, find a dry camping spot on the far bank of the -second branch. Once they found a trail, they marked it -with blazes on all trees above the waterline.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_148">148</div> -<p>But how to get the loaded pack horses across both -branches of the river? The horses could wade to the first -channel easily enough, but when in deep water they -would have to swim, and they could not swim with their -heavy packs. Once again Colonel Clark solved his new -problem. He had his men build a scaffold in a shallow -spot beyond the second river bank.</p> -<p>When this was finished, the men unloaded the horses -and moved the baggage over to the scaffold in their pirogue. -Then they swam the horses through both channels, -reloading the animals at the scaffold. They also -ferried any ill, weak soldiers across both river branches.</p> -<p>As Colonel Clark himself plunged into the water, he -expected the rest of his army to follow him along the -tree-blazed route. But the men hung back, complaining -they were already cold and wet enough without wading -another five miles.</p> -<p>Suddenly Willie Watson, seeing Colonel Clark floundering -through the water alone, seized Jim’s drum and -started into the water, beating the drum as hard as he -could. “Come on, you,” he called, beating a terrific roll. -Jim plunged in right behind Willie, holding his rifle high -above his head.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_149">149</div> -<p>Soon the water was up to Willie’s armpits. He pushed -the drum down and sat on it, floating along and paddling -the water with his drumsticks. “Come on, you fellows,” -he called. “Somebody give me a push.”</p> -<p>A French sergeant, almost six and a half feet tall, -charged into the water, scooped up Willie and his drum, -put him on his shoulders and shouted, “Advance!”</p> -<p>Willie’s courageous antics turned the trick for Colonel -Clark. While Willie played and sang at the top of his -lungs, the rest of the soldiers waded into the water and -did not turn back, though in some places the water came -up to their chins. But no dry spot could be found, so they -had to spend the night in shallow water without food.</p> -<p>Somehow they continued to march through the ice-cold -drowned lands until they had crossed the Embarrass -and Wabash Rivers. Here the men in their soaking wet -clothes were more discouraged than ever. This was the -place where the <i>Willing</i> was supposed to be waiting for -them. The warship, however, had not arrived.</p> -<p>The next day the camp awakened to a dull boom.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_150">150</div> -<p>“What’s that?” Willie cried, poking Jim who lay beside -him.</p> -<p>“I don’t know,” Jim mumbled. “Sounded like guns, -didn’t it?”</p> -<p>One soldier overheard the boys and said, “Colonel -Clark said those were the British morning guns at Fort -Sackville.”</p> -<p>“Why, we’re almost there,” Jim cried, jumping up and -stretching.</p> -<p>“Almost there!” sneered another soldier. “Take a look -at that water.”</p> -<p>“Where are we?” Willie asked, rubbing the sleep out -of his eyes.</p> -<p>“About nine miles below Vincennes on the banks of -the Great Wabash!” a nearby soldier exclaimed. “But -how we’ll ever get across that flood water I don’t know.” -Several more men began to complain, and some even -muttered about going home.</p> -<p>Jim and Willie looked around and saw Captain -McCarty’s men cutting down poplar trees.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_151">151</div> -<p>“Come on, Willie,” Jim said. “Let’s see what they’re -going to do with those trees.”</p> -<p>The boys went over to help drag the poplars to a dry -area where the men could build canoes. They worked all -day and by evening had finished two. Meanwhile the -boys saw two more drifting aimlessly on the flood waters, -so they waded out and captured them. Now Colonel -Clark had four canoes to ferry his army over some of this -vast expanse of river.</p> -<p>The next morning it was raining again and the water -was still quite cold. Though the soldiers still had had -nothing to eat, the stronger ones began ferrying the -troops over to a small hill called Bubbie. From here they -waded to a larger hill, clutching trees and bushes in the -water to steady themselves. The canoes went alongside -to watch for any sick men.</p> -<p>Those who were able built fires on the opposite side of -the river and marched the exhausted men up and down -in front of the fire to revive them.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_152">152</div> -<p>At last they reached Warrior’s Island, a dry spot of -about ten acres. From here Clark planned to attack Fort -Sackville. The men had to rest, however, before he could -order the attack.</p> -<p>A day or two later, some of Clark’s scouts brought two -Indian squaws and two half-grown boys into camp and -presented them to him.</p> -<p>“What do I want with these people?” Clark demanded. -“I haven’t anything to feed to my own men, to -say nothing of four prisoners.”</p> -<p>“That’s it, sir,” one scout replied. “They had food in -their canoe. It was filled with kettles, tallow, corn and -half a quarter of buffalo meat. We have it here, but what -shall we do with these Indians?”</p> -<p>“Food!” cried several of the men near the colonel. -“Where?”</p> -<p>“Make some buffalo stew for the men immediately,” -Clark ordered. He looked at the trembling Indians. “I -guess we’ll have to take these prisoners to Vincennes -with us.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_153">153</div> -<p>Just at this moment Jim and Willie came up to the -colonel. When Jim saw the Indians, he stopped and -stared as if he didn’t believe his own eyes. Then he -dashed over to the taller Indian boy. “Wahbunou!” he -cried. “What are you doing here?”</p> -<p>Wahbunou tried to smile, but was too frightened to -talk. He just grabbed Jim and clung to him.</p> -<p>George Rogers Clark looked at Jim in amazement. -“Jim, do you know this boy?”</p> -<p>“Oh, sir,” Jim cried, “this is Wahbunou, my Potawatomi -friend that I told you about.”</p> -<p>Colonel Clark looked keenly at the boy and then at -Jim. “Is this the boy who did not tell his people about -seeing the Long-Knives marching that summer afternoon?”</p> -<p>“Yes, sir.”</p> -<p>Clark smiled at the Indian boy. “Well then, Wahbunou, -I am sorry we had to take your food. But my men -have had nothing to eat for several days. You are no -longer a prisoner of Chief Long-Knife. All four of you -are free to take your canoe and return home.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_154">154</div> -<p>Wahbunou did not understand all that Colonel Clark -said to him, but when Jim interpreted, the Indian boy -nodded his head and smiled.</p> -<p>George Rogers Clark shook hands with Wahbunou -and said, “If you will come to Fort Sackville in a few -days I’ll pay you for your food. Unfortunately, I have -nothing to give you for it tonight.”</p> -<p>Wahbunou nodded again, spoke to his Indian companions -and motioned for them to follow him. They -found their canoe and paddled rapidly away.</p> -<p>Meanwhile the men were busy making buffalo stew. -When it was ready the weakest men were fed first. -Though there wasn’t enough stew to go around, it revived -many exhausted soldiers and improved the spirit of -all the soldiers.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_155">155</div> -<div class="img" id="pic2"> -<img src="images/p20.jpg" alt="" width="800" height="457" /> -<p class="caption"><i>Vincennes</i></p> -</div> -<h2 id="c10"><span class="h2line1">Chapter X</span> -<br /><span class="h2line2">CAPTURE OF VINCENNES</span></h2> -<p>From their camp the men could see the hundred cabins -making up the town of Vincennes, and Fort Sackville -over which the Union Jack was flying. If settlers in Vincennes -turned toward Warrior’s Island, they could see -American soldiers; so George Rogers Clark employed a -trick of war to make them think he commanded a large -army.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_156">156</div> -<p>While the men were resting after their taste of buffalo -stew, two more of Clark’s scouts came into camp bringing -a very frightened Frenchman from Vincennes. They -said they had found him lurking near the camp. Willie -and Jim had been sitting near the colonel and could hear -everything he said to the Frenchman.</p> -<p>Clark spoke sternly to the man cowering in front of -him. “I will permit you to go into town under certain -conditions. First you are to alert all French inhabitants -and tell them we will take Vincennes tonight. They are -to stay in their houses, keep quiet and not to let any one -at Fort Sackville know of our presence. Oh, yes, and tell -them to have a fine supper ready for us.”</p> -<p>“Yes, sir,” the man replied. “And to think you’ve -marched all the way from Kentucky!”</p> -<p>Clark did not correct the man’s guess about Kentucky. -He merely said, “Now you may go, but do not go near -the fort.” As the Frenchman hurried to Vincennes to deliver -his message, Colonel Clark watched through his -field glass to see that he did not go to the fort.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_157">157</div> -<p>About sunset Clark ordered his army to assemble. -When they were in their respective companies, with Jim -and Willie in front, Colonel Clark said, “I ask just one -thing of all of you—<span class="smaller">OBEDIENCE</span>. Absolute <span class="smaller">OBEDIENCE</span>.”</p> -<p>“Yes, sir,” every man replied.</p> -<p>Clark turned to Jim and Willie. “You boys bring out -the flags which we brought from Kaskaskia. We have -good use for them now.”</p> -<p>The boys went over to the small stock of supplies they -had succeeded in bringing through the water, and took -out the flags. These had been so well packed they were -not even damp. There were twenty-four in all.</p> -<p>“Each officer is to have a pair of flags mounted on -poles,” Clark said.</p> -<p>The officers mounted several flags as Clark had directed. -Willie and Jim wondered what they would do -with the rest.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_158">158</div> -<p>“See that small hill between us and the town?” Clark -pointed to a hill about halfway to Vincennes. “You are -to march your men around and around that hill, every -sixth man carrying a flag so far as possible. Thus you will -give the effect of many divisions, each carrying its flag, to -anyone watching from Vincennes. When I give the order, -you march around that hill until dark. Then I will -issue your orders for the night.”</p> -<p>Colonel Clark led the line of march, followed by Willie -Watson with the drum, Jim Hudson, Captain McCarty -and the first of the color bearers. They marched around -and around the hill in plain view of the townspeople. -Should anyone be watching, he might easily assume that -George Rogers Clark had at least a thousand men at his -command.</p> -<p>Finally night fell. Tension was mounting among the -men. Now, now was the time for attack. How many -men did Hamilton have? Had this army come all -through the drowned lands to suffer defeat? Never, -while they drew breath.</p> -<p>Such thoughts were in the mind of every man when -Colonel Clark suddenly snapped them to attention.</p> -<p>“Lieutenant Baily,” he ordered, “take fourteen of your -best men and begin firing on the fort as soon as we have -reached Vincennes. Then cease firing for a few minutes -and laugh loudly as though you were firing for amusement.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_159">159</div> -<p>The lieutenant stepped forward and called out fourteen -men.</p> -<p>Colonel Clark went on. “I will lead the rest of this -army to the heights behind Vincennes and enter the upper -part of town. The sentinels on the stockade walls -won’t be able to see us, because part of the town lies between -our line of march and their garrison.”</p> -<p>Then he set out with the main army toward Vincennes, -while Lieutenant Baily marched his fourteen men toward -the stockade.</p> -<p>Jim and Willie, marching with the main army, became -so excited they could scarcely set one foot after the other. -In no time at all Clark’s army took possession of the main -street and posted guards. Scarcely anyone was in sight -because of Clark’s order for the people to remain in their -houses. Jim was assigned to guard duty; Willie went -with Colonel Clark on his rounds through the town.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_160">160</div> -<p>In a little while Willie came hurrying back to Jim. -“Jim,” he cried. “The people have supper ready for us. -We’re going to take turns eating. Colonel Clark said he’d -send a man to relieve you shortly, and you’re to come -with me.”</p> -<p>Just at this moment there was a burst of rifle fire, then -the sound of raucous laughter.</p> -<p>“Our men have begun the attack, Willie,” Jim cried, -peering into the black night. “We’ll soon take Vincennes -and the fort.”</p> -<p>There was, however, no answering fire from the fort. -In a few minutes another volley of shots rent the air.</p> -<p>“Let’s go nearer to the fort, Jim, and see what’s going -on.”</p> -<p>Jim shook his head. “I can’t, Willie. I’m on guard -here, remember.”</p> -<p>After another burst of fire by the Americans, there was -a sudden, answering roar from the guns inside the fort.</p> -<p>Just at this moment Colonel Clark appeared with a -man to relieve Jim. “You boys eat your supper. Report -back here when you’ve finished, Jim,” Clark said, and -went on to direct the firing which was now continuous.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_161">161</div> -<div class="img"> -<img src="images/p21.jpg" alt="uncaptioned" width="800" height="984" /> -</div> -<div class="pb" id="Page_162">162</div> -<p>“Come on, Jim. I know where we’re supposed to go.” -Willie led the way to one of the villagers’ homes, where -seven or eight soldiers were just finishing their meal.</p> -<p>“Come in, boys,” called a rosy-cheeked woman. -“There is plenty of food for all of you.”</p> -<p>The boys sat down to a bountiful dinner of roast duck, -the best meal they had eaten since their buffalo feast -many days ago. While they were eating, the woman kept -staring at Jim. Finally she said, “Soldier, have I seen you -before? There’s something very familiar about your -face.”</p> -<p>Jim looked blankly at her. “I don’t know, ma’am. I -don’t recall ever having seen you.”</p> -<p>Still she looked at him. “It’s sure queer. You remind -me of someone. I can’t quite figure—say, what’s your -name? Mine’s Jeanne Duval.”</p> -<p>Jim smiled. “Sometimes I’m called Jim Long-Knife. -The Indians gave me that name. But my real name’s Jim -Hudson.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_163">163</div> -<p>“Hudson!” Jeanne exclaimed, her voice shrill with excitement. -“And where’s your home?”</p> -<p>Jim shook his head. “I haven’t any home now except -with Colonel Clark. I used to live in Kentucky.”</p> -<p>“Kentucky, you say. I wonder if you—”</p> -<p>The roar of cannon from Fort Sackville cut off her -words. Jim and Willie jumped up. “Thank you, ma’am, -for the good dinner. We can fight better now,” Jim said, -as they started out the door.</p> -<p>“When the fighting’s over, come back here, Jim. -Come back for sure.”</p> -<p>“All right,” Jim replied, “if I’m alive.”</p> -<p>The boys made their way back to Jim’s post and found -it in the thick of the fighting. American soldiers were -pouring the hottest fire possible into the fort.</p> -<p>“Look, Willie,” Jim said as he got his rifle ready, “look -at those gaps in the stockade.”</p> -<p>Just then the British poked an artillery piece out of a -porthole, while the Americans sent a shower of well-directed -balls into it.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_164">164</div> -<p>“Hurrah!” cried Willie, “got some British that time.”</p> -<p>The intense firing from both sides went on until about -four o’clock in the morning. Then Colonel Clark withdrew -all his troops save a few observation parties, and -the firing ceased.</p> -<p>About nine o’clock George Rogers Clark sent a flag of -truce into the fort with a message to Hamilton asking -him to surrender immediately. This Hamilton refused -to do and the firing began anew. But three hours later -Hamilton sent out a flag asking for a three-days’ truce. -Clark refused, but offered to have a conference with -Hamilton in the church at once.</p> -<p>While Clark waited for his answer, everyone outside -the fort, French and Americans alike, watched the fort -gate to see what would happen. Willie and Jim were in -the front row, waiting as impatiently as the rest.</p> -<p>“Jim!” Willie cried. “Look! The gate is opening.”</p> -<p>And indeed it was. Out came a dignified man in the -striking red uniform of a British colonel of regulars, a -handsome Indian and a grinning American.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_165">165</div> -<p>“That man in red must be Hamilton himself,” Willie -whispered.</p> -<p>“And there’s Captain Helm!” exclaimed Jim. “You -know he’s been Hamilton’s prisoner since last December.”</p> -<p>The three men walked on to the church. There they -were met by George Rogers Clark and Captain Bowman. -All of them went into the church to hold their conference.</p> -<p>The villagers all began talking at once, wondering -what would happen next. The American soldiers relaxed -a little, but still held their rifles.</p> -<p>As Willie and Jim started to walk up the street, a -woman ran out from the crowd calling to them. “Boys! -Jim Hudson.”</p> -<p>Jim turned and recognized Jeanne Duval. She was -calling and beckoning to him. “Come with me, Jim. To -my house.” She nodded toward Willie. “You may come -too, lad.”</p> -<p>“I can only stay a minute, ma’am,” Jim replied, glancing -back at the church. “Colonel Clark might want me.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_166">166</div> -<p>“All right. Just come on.” She hurried on ahead and -rushed into her house. When the boys appeared she -said, “Sit down a minute. I’ll be right back.” Then she -disappeared out the back door.</p> -<p>Willie shook his head. “What kind of business is this, -Jim? Do you suppose it’s a trap?”</p> -<p>Jim laughed. “I don’t think so, Willie. After all we -aren’t such important people in Clark’s army. She’s probably -going to feed us again.”</p> -<p>In a few moments she returned with a thin, tired-looking -blond woman. Jim stared at her for an instant, then -rushed over and swept her into his arms. “Ma! Ma!” he -cried. “At last! I’d almost given up hope of finding -you.”</p> -<p>Ma Hudson was laughing and crying at the same time. -“Jim, how you’ve grown! Why, you’re a man! Jim -dear, we knew you were alive and well in Kaskaskia. -Captain Helm told Pa.”</p> -<p>“Captain Helm? But he’s a prisoner of Hamilton. -And where is Pa?”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_167">167</div> -<p>Ma looked worried. “I hope he’s still alive in the fort. -Pa and I are also Hamilton’s prisoners. Pa’s probably had -to man the guns against the Americans.”</p> -<p>“Against his own countrymen!” Jim gasped. “How -do you happen to be outside the fort?”</p> -<p>Ma shrugged her thin shoulders. “Since there wasn’t -any place for women in the fort, the British put me in one -of the French homes here. And the people have been -good to me.” She smiled at Jeanne Duval.</p> -<p>“She’s been staying right next door,” Jeanne explained. -“That’s why I was so excited last night when -I saw you. You look so much like your ma, and when -you told me your name, I was sure you were her boy.”</p> -<p>“How did you get away from the Shawnees and reach -Vincennes, Ma?”</p> -<p>Ma Hudson sighed. “We didn’t get away from them, -Jim. I think they intended to take us up north to Hamilton, -but the snows came and they weren’t able to get -through to Detroit. It was a rugged winter, with not -much to eat.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_168">168</div> -<p>Jim frowned. “How did you and Pa get down here?”</p> -<p>“Last autumn the Shawnees heard Hamilton was -marching south, so they rode to meet him and traded us -for some guns and blankets. Hamilton brought us -down here with other prisoners. I’ve been mending for -Hamilton’s soldiers and sewing some for the people here. -Your pa has been helping repair the fort.”</p> -<p>Jim had forgotten all about Willie while talking with -his mother. Suddenly he remembered him and said, “Ma, -this is my best friend, Willie Watson. He’s from Kaskaskia.”</p> -<p>Ma smiled at Willie. “I’m glad to know you, Willie. -You must have wonderful people in Kaskaskia, because -Jim looks so well.”</p> -<p>“The same to you, ma’am,” stammered Willie, bobbing -his head.</p> -<p>“We’d better be getting back now, Ma,” Jim said. “I’ll -see you when Hamilton surrenders. Don’t worry about -Pa. I’m sure he’s all right and will be free as soon as Colonel -Clark takes over here.” Jim turned to Jeanne Duval. -“Thank you, ma’am, for all you’ve done for Ma and me.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_169">169</div> -<p>When the boys returned to the American lines, the conference -was over. No one was certain, however, that -Hamilton would agree to the surrender terms. Colonel -Clark took no chances of deception by the British; he -posted guards in houses near the fort and patrols in town. -The rest of his army slept on their rifles and got their -first real rest in many days.</p> -<p>The next day, February 25, 1779, Hamilton sent Captain -Helm to Colonel Clark with the signed articles of -surrender. George Rogers Clark then drew up his army -in two lines facing each other in front of Fort Sackville -to await Hamilton. All of Vincennes gathered behind the -American army to see the surrender.</p> -<p>Promptly at ten o’clock the wooden fort gate opened, -and Lieutenant-Governor Hamilton led his well-drilled, -scarlet-clad regulars of the King’s regiment between the -lines of the ragged American soldiers. Captain Helm, -amidst loud hurrahs from the crowd, hoisted the American -flag above Fort Sackville. Fort Sackville and Vincennes -were now in American hands, never to be surrendered again.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_170">170</div> -<p>Hamilton’s prisoners of war were also turned over to -Colonel Clark, among them Pa Hudson. When Jim spied -him in the group, he forgot all about his duty as a soldier -and rushed over to throw his arms around his father.</p> -<p>“Pa,” he cried, “I knew I’d find you sometime.”</p> -<p>His father hugged him hard. “Ma and I knew from -Captain Helm that you were safe in Kaskaskia, but we -didn’t know when we could get to you.”</p> -<p>When the celebrations and ceremonies of surrender -were over, George Rogers Clark dispatched a detail to -Virginia with Hamilton, his prisoner of war, and sent -home the French who had accompanied the British leader -from Detroit.</p> -<p>Then Clark looked over the stores and supplies in the -fort. In them he found much clothing which had been -sent from Detroit for the British troops. From this supply -every man in Clark’s army received new shirts, caps, -vests and trousers. These were most welcome gifts because -the men wanted to be presentable when they returned -in triumph to Kaskaskia.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_171">171</div> -<div class="img"> -<img src="images/p22.jpg" alt="uncaptioned" width="800" height="1119" /> -</div> -<div class="pb" id="Page_172">172</div> -<p>The Indians near Vincennes must have heard about -Clark’s gifts, because early one morning several of them -came to the fort to receive presents from Chief Long-Knife. -Jim was helping to distribute these when he recognized -Wahbunou in the group.</p> -<p>“Here’s Wahbunou, Colonel Clark,” he said as the Indian -boy approached them.</p> -<p>Colonel Clark smiled and extended his hand to Wahbunou. -“You’ve come to be paid for that buffalo meat -and corn, I suppose. Well, boy, I’m glad to pay you. They -saved our lives and made it possible for us to take Vincennes.” -The colonel himself looked through the supplies -and brought out two magnificent blankets. “Can -you use these blankets, Wahbunou?”</p> -<p>Wahbunou’s eyes shone as he took the blankets. -“These are very good, Chief Long-Knife. I have been -paid plenty. I am glad my people could help Jim’s people. -Jim is my friend.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_173">173</div> -<p>Jim took Wahbunou to one side. “My parents are here, -Wahbunou,” he said. “They were Hamilton’s prisoners, -but now they are free. Won’t you stop and see them?”</p> -<p>Wahbunou beamed. “I’m glad you are with them. I -can’t stop now, but Wahbunou will see your mother when -he comes to Vincennes again soon. Your mother was -very kind to me.” Then he turned and went back to the -other Indians.</p> -<p>Before Colonel Clark led his men back to Kaskaskia, he -took Willie Watson to make a call on the Hudsons. Pa -Hudson wanted to return to his farm in Kentucky and -asked Colonel Clark if he would advise going.</p> -<p>Clark was silent for a few minutes, then shook his -head. “Not yet, Hudson. Why don’t you stay here until -summer? If everything is favorable then, you and your -family can return to Kentucky. I’ll be back in June as -we intend to march on Detroit.” Then he turned to shake -hands with Jim.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_174">174</div> -<p>“You’ve been a good soldier, Jim Long-Knife. They -don’t come any better than you. I’ll say good-bye now -and expect to see you when I return.”</p> -<p>Jim’s eyes misted as he said, “Thanks for everything, -Colonel. I’ve learned a lot from you.”</p> -<p>Willie had been unusually silent during the call. Now -he said, “Good-bye, Jim. Take care of yourself. I’ll miss -you more——” his voice broke and he could not finish -what he wanted to say.</p> -<p>Jim clapped Willie’s shoulder affectionately. “Good-bye, -Willie. You stay with Colonel Clark and the Long-Knives -and you’ll be all right. See you in June.”</p> -<div class="img"> -<img src="images/p23.jpg" alt="uncaptioned" width="500" height="559" /> -</div> -<hr class="dwide" /> -<div class="box"> -<h2 id="c11"><span class="h2line1"><i>Jim Long-Knife</i></span></h2> -<p class="center"><i>By</i> -<br />FLORANCE WALTON TAYLOR</p> -<p class="center"><i>Illustrated by</i> -<br />DIRK GRINGHUIS</p> -<p>Boys and girls living at the time of our War of -Independence, took an active part in that struggle. -Out West, they not only fought the British, but the -Indians as well. Kaskaskia and Vincennes were not -just towns, but stood for hard battle and hard won -victory.</p> -<p>Jim Hudson, named Jim Long-Knife by Chief -Minnemung is a pioneer boy living in Kentucky. -How he is separated from his parents, how he lives -with the Indians, and how he fights alongside -George Rogers Clark, is a story filled with suspense -and courage. Jim has good friends, including the -Indian boy Wahbunou, but it is his drum that, -many times, keeps him from danger.</p> -<p><i>Shemolsea</i>—Long-Knife is an important part of -early western history—and Jim helped make it so.</p> -</div> -<h2 id="trnotes">Transcriber’s Notes</h2> -<ul> -<li>Silently corrected a few typos.</li> -<li>Retained publication information from the printed edition: this eBook is public-domain in the country of publication.</li> -<li>In the text versions only, text in italics is delimited by _underscores_.</li> -</ul> -<div style='display:block; margin-top:4em'>*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK JIM LONG-KNIFE ***</div> -<div style='text-align:left'> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will -be renamed. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG™ -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following -the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use -of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for -copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very -easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation -of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project -Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away--you may -do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected -by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark -license, especially commercial redistribution. -</div> - -<div style='margin:0.83em 0; font-size:1.1em; text-align:center'>START: FULL LICENSE<br /> -<span style='font-size:smaller'>THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE<br /> -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK</span> -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project -Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg™ License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg™ -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg™ electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person -or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg™ electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg™ electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg™ -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the -Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg™ -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg™ name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg™ License when -you share it without charge with others. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg™ work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country other than the United States. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg™ License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg™ work (any work -on which the phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the -phrase “Project Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: -</div> - -<blockquote> - <div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most - other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions - whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms - of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online - at <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you - are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws - of the country where you are located before using this eBook. - </div> -</blockquote> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase “Project -Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg™ -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg™ License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg™ -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg™. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg™ License. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg™ work in a format -other than “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg™ website -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original “Plain -Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg™ License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg™ works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works -provided that: -</div> - -<div style='margin-left:0.7em;'> - <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> - • You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg™ works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, “Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation.” - </div> - - <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> - • You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ - works. - </div> - - <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> - • You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - </div> - - <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> - • You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg™ works. - </div> -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg™ electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of -the Project Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set -forth in Section 3 below. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg™ collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain “Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the “Right -of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg™ work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg™ work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg™ -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Project Gutenberg™ is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg™’s -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg™ collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg™ and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state’s laws. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -The Foundation’s business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, -Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up -to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website -and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread -public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular state -visit <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org/donate/">www.gutenberg.org/donate</a>. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg™ electronic works -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg™ concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg™ eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Project Gutenberg™ eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Most people start at our website which has the main PG search -facility: <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -This website includes information about Project Gutenberg™, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. -</div> - -</div> - -</body> -</html> diff --git a/old/65942-h/images/cover.jpg b/old/65942-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 08dbd3c..0000000 --- a/old/65942-h/images/cover.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/65942-h/images/p01a.jpg b/old/65942-h/images/p01a.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index dc47cdb..0000000 --- a/old/65942-h/images/p01a.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/65942-h/images/p02.jpg b/old/65942-h/images/p02.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index dc9f577..0000000 --- a/old/65942-h/images/p02.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/65942-h/images/p03.jpg b/old/65942-h/images/p03.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 29fd2c4..0000000 --- a/old/65942-h/images/p03.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/65942-h/images/p04.jpg b/old/65942-h/images/p04.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 3a2aa59..0000000 --- a/old/65942-h/images/p04.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/65942-h/images/p04a.jpg b/old/65942-h/images/p04a.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d473052..0000000 --- a/old/65942-h/images/p04a.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/65942-h/images/p05.jpg b/old/65942-h/images/p05.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 323ffec..0000000 --- a/old/65942-h/images/p05.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/65942-h/images/p06.jpg b/old/65942-h/images/p06.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0e04759..0000000 --- a/old/65942-h/images/p06.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/65942-h/images/p07.jpg b/old/65942-h/images/p07.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ee72b3d..0000000 --- a/old/65942-h/images/p07.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/65942-h/images/p08.jpg b/old/65942-h/images/p08.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 19efe99..0000000 --- a/old/65942-h/images/p08.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/65942-h/images/p09.jpg b/old/65942-h/images/p09.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8dc9f2b..0000000 --- a/old/65942-h/images/p09.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/65942-h/images/p10.jpg b/old/65942-h/images/p10.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 9e29304..0000000 --- a/old/65942-h/images/p10.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/65942-h/images/p11.jpg b/old/65942-h/images/p11.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d5ee600..0000000 --- a/old/65942-h/images/p11.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/65942-h/images/p12.jpg b/old/65942-h/images/p12.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 3279741..0000000 --- a/old/65942-h/images/p12.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/65942-h/images/p13.jpg b/old/65942-h/images/p13.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 7547206..0000000 --- a/old/65942-h/images/p13.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/65942-h/images/p14.jpg b/old/65942-h/images/p14.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0d59694..0000000 --- a/old/65942-h/images/p14.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/65942-h/images/p15.jpg b/old/65942-h/images/p15.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 901874f..0000000 --- a/old/65942-h/images/p15.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/65942-h/images/p16.jpg b/old/65942-h/images/p16.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2130951..0000000 --- a/old/65942-h/images/p16.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/65942-h/images/p17.jpg b/old/65942-h/images/p17.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 92090ed..0000000 --- a/old/65942-h/images/p17.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/65942-h/images/p18.jpg b/old/65942-h/images/p18.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b7435b1..0000000 --- a/old/65942-h/images/p18.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/65942-h/images/p19.jpg b/old/65942-h/images/p19.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 307e314..0000000 --- a/old/65942-h/images/p19.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/65942-h/images/p20.jpg b/old/65942-h/images/p20.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index eb252cb..0000000 --- a/old/65942-h/images/p20.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/65942-h/images/p21.jpg b/old/65942-h/images/p21.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 3f45af6..0000000 --- a/old/65942-h/images/p21.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/65942-h/images/p22.jpg b/old/65942-h/images/p22.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 461a3f9..0000000 --- a/old/65942-h/images/p22.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/65942-h/images/p23.jpg b/old/65942-h/images/p23.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 23bd590..0000000 --- a/old/65942-h/images/p23.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/65942-h/images/spine.jpg b/old/65942-h/images/spine.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c93c8df..0000000 --- a/old/65942-h/images/spine.jpg +++ /dev/null |
